W\\

^''

The
tine

Cornell University
Library

original of

tliis

bool<

is in

Cornell University Library.

There are no known copyright

restrictions in

the United States on the use of the

text.

http://www.archive.org/details/cu31 924021 6071 91

PA 8I3.N97""
The elements

of

"""'"">'

"*""^

New Testament Greek

3 1924 021

;a

607 191

THE ELEMENTS
OF

NEW TESTAMENT GREEK

BY THE SAME AUTHOR

A Short Syntax of New Testament
Cambridge University

Greek

Press, 2/6 net

THE ELEMENTS
OF

NEW TESTAMENT GREEK

A

METHOD OF STUDYING THE GREEK

NEW TESTAMENT WITH EXERCISES
by
Rev. H. P. V.

NUNN,

M.A.

Cambridge, sometime Lecturer

Aidan's College, Birkenhead

St John's College,
St

Cambridge
at

the University Press

1914

at

CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS

IlDnlron:

FETTEE LANE,

C. F.

Berlin:

PRINCES STREET

ASHER AND CO.

F. A. BROCKHAUS

A.

S-eipjia:

iJefaaotfi:

CLAY, Manager

100,

(EDinliutflf):

E.G.

G. P.

PUTNAM'S SONS

MACMILLAN AND CO.. Ltd.

STotonto: J. M. DENT AND SONS, Ltd.
JCofcao: THE MARUZEN-KABUSHIKI-KAISHA

Botnfiaa an* aralratta:

PREFACE

THIS

book

intended principally for those

is

who wish

take up the study of Greek after they have

with a view to reading the Greek

New

to

left school

Testament.

It is

concerned only with such words and forms as are found in

New

Testament Greek. The words used in the exercises

which occur frequently in the Gospels and the Acts

are those

of the Apostles

they are collected in vocabularies at the

end of the book, and

are carefully

it is

committed

believed that, if these vocabularies

to

memory, the student

will find

himself supplied with such words as are necessary to enable

him to read these portions of the

and rapidity.

New

Testament with ease

The author attaches great importance to the accurate

knowledge of the meanings of the most common words as an
aid to the thorough and rapid acquirement of a language.
Fortunately the words used in the Gospels and in the Acts
are comparatively few, and this fact together with the
simplicity of their style makes these books in many respects
very suitable first reading books even for those who do not
intend to limit their study of the Greek language to the

New

Testament.

The most common irregular verbs

into the exercises

and are

are gradually introduced

also collected in a table at the

The
of the book.
almost verbatim from the Greek Testament.

end

sentences in the later exercises are taken

/it

The verbs

in

are not introduced until the end of the book and the

VI

PREFACE

author therefore recommends that the Greek Testament

should not be studied until these verbs have been
mastered and all the Greek into English exercises in the

itself

book have been written

out.

Those who wish to become

proficient in the subject should also write out all the English^

into Greek exercises.

In no studj' is the saying of Bacon that writing maketh

an exact man so thoroughly exemplified as in the study of
languages.

The order

in which the forms and constructions treated

determined by the principle

which occur most frequently.
Syntax is only treated so far as to enable examples to be
given of the use of the Subjunctive and Infinitive moods and
in the exercises are placed

that those are treated

of the Participle.

is

first

The author ventures

to refer those

who

on this subject to his Short

Syntax of New Testament Greek published by the Cambridge
University Press, to which reference is occasionally made in
desire

further information

footnotes in this book.

The Introduction

Grammar

is

to that

book on the subject of English

reprinted here as an Appendix.

Although

it is

printed at the end of the book, the author would urge that
it

should be studied at the beginning by those to

whom

its

contents are partially unfamiliar.

is hoped that a student who has been carefully through
book will be able to read the easier portions of the New
Testament with the aid of a dictionary. As however the

It

this

New Testament is already so familiar

most people in an English translation, such a power does
not really imply much knowledge of Greek. Those who*
wish to gain an intelligent knowledge of the language should
subject-matter of the
to

PEEFACE

Vll

study some easy Greek author whose meaning

is

not already

Such may be found in any of the

many elementary editions of Xenophon or Lucian which are
published^ or even in Plato's Apology of Socrates studied
with or without the help of a translation. The latter book
is so interesting and important in its contents and so perfect
and yet so simple in its style that it should be studied in
the original language by all those who have 'the opportunity.
Translations of Lucian and of Plato's Apology are published
in a convenient form by the Oxford University Press.
familiar

to

them.

If these books are thought to be too difficult the writings

Clement
and the Shepherd of Hermas, may be recommended. These
latter books are however not published in a form adapted for
beginners, and the author has therefore attempted to meet
this need by publishing selections from them and from other
of the Apostolic Fathers, especially the Epistle of St

Christian authors of the

end of the

In

"

Syntax

conclusion

first

two centuries with notes at the

" referred to above.

he wishes to record

Messrs Bradley and Horswell for their

Word

his

obligation to

"New

Testament

Lists," which were of great service in preparing the

exercises in this book,

and

which he looked over the

to his father for the care with

proofs.

H. P. V.

NUNN.

175 Stockport Road,

Manchester.
November

'

6,

1913.

See the "Elementary Classics" series published by Macmillan.

CONTENTS
TjESSON

II

PAGE

The Alphabet

I
'

Breathihgs, accents, iota subscript

...

....

III

The Present

Indicative Active

IV

The Present

Indicative of contracted verbs in

Nouns of the Second Declension ending in os

The Genitive and Dative cases, the Definite Article

10

VI
VII

Neuter Nouns

14

VIII

IX

fm
.

of the

Second Declension

Feminine Nouns of the First Declension

...

13

16

Masculine Nouns of the First Declension,

17

etc.

Adjectives of the Second Declension, Present Tense

of

"To be"

19

XI

The Imperfect Indicative

XII

Imperfect of the verb "To be," Demonstrative Pronoims, airos

25

XIII

The Present and Imperfect

27

XIV

Deponent Verbs, the Present Imperative, the Relative

Pronoun

XV

The Present

XVI

The Future

Active, Accentuation of

verbs

Indicative Passive

...

Infinitive, Personal

35
Indicative

Middle Voice

Active and Middle, the

......

40

Reflexive Pronoun, questions

43

Twostemsof verbs, the

The

31

and Possessive Pro-

nouns

XVII
XVIII

21

First Aorist Active

47

XIX

The Second Aorist Active, Object clauses after verbs

XX

The Future and Aorist Active

of saying or thinking.

Temporal clauses

of

liquid

51

verbs,

55

CONTENTS
PAOB

LESSON

XXI
XXII

The Third Declension

Nouns with stems ending

58
in a vowel,

Neuter Nouns
62

of the Third Declension

XXIII

Adjectives

of

the

Third

Irregular

Declension,

65

Adjectives

XXrV

The

and Second Aorist Passive, the Future

First

68

Passive

XXV

72

Participles

XXVI

The Genitive Absolute,

XXVII

The

Interrogative

Pronouns, certain Prepositions

Indefinite

and Second Aorist Middle, the comparison

Adjectives, Adverbs

Contracted Verbs ending in

aa>

and oa

....

XXIX

The

XXX

The Subjunctive Mood

XXXI

Subjunctive of Contracted Verbs and of

Perfect

and Pluperfect Tenses

XXXIV

XXXV
XXXVI
XXXVII

in fu

99
102

diSa/u

106

110

7-Mij/tt

112

twniiu

Other Verbs in

.116

^i

The Optative Mood, Periphrastic Tenses

Vocabularies
The Regular Verb
Table of Principal Parts of Verbs

Appendix

91

further

Further uses of the Infinitive

The Verbs

82
87

95
elfu,

uses of the Subjunctive

XXXII
XXXIII

77

First
of

XXVIII

and

I.

....

III.

Accentuation

IV.

English

....
...

Grammar

English-Greek Vocabulary

142

149
164

Conditional Sentences

II.

119
122

Prepositions

Greek Index

161

164
168

igg^

200

LESSON

THE ALPHABET
The Greek Alphabet

consists of 24 letters, a good

many

of which

are identical with the corresponding letters of the Latin alphabet

which we

Both alphabets were derived from the Phoefrom which the Hebrew alphabet also took its origin.
The letters given in the second column are now used only as capital
letters in printed Greek books
but originally letters like these were
used in all Greek writing. They are generally called Uncial letters,
and all the earliest manuscripts of the New Testament are called
still

employ.

nician alphabet,

Uncial Manuscripts, because they are written throughout in these

letters.

another style of writing more resembling

came into general use. These were
called Cursive or running letters, because they could be written without
raising the pen from the paper, like our modern handwriting.
This type of writing has remained in use ever since, both in

About the 9th century

a.d.

the letters in the second column

manuscripts and printed books, with certain modifications.

The student should learn the list of the names of the letters down
the column thoroughly in order that he may be able to find the words
in his Dictionary as quickly as possible.
He should make sure of the letters both by reading aloud and by
writing, as much time will afterwards be saved if he is able to read
accurately and quickly, and to grasp the sound of a word as soon as
It will be noticed that there are two letters to
it written.
represent the English letter " e," and two to represent the letter " o."
One of these represents the short sound of the letter, and the other
the long sound. The mark - written over a letter denotes that it is
to be pronounced long, and the mark - that it is to be pronounced

he sees

short.
letters

This distinction in the length of the sound denoted by the

carefully observed in pronunciation.

must be

PRONUNCIATION

Notes on the Alphabet

The examples given

(1)

to

show the pronunciation

of

a,

f. rj,

i,

indicate the pronunciation generally given to these letters in English

It is

schools.

however certainly wrong, as

is

also the usual English

pronunciation of Latin.

more

correct prommciation would probably be as follows

a in " father."

a to be pronounced as

to be pronounced as y in " they."

pronounced as i in " machine "

r]

to be

when

when

long,

and as

in " pit

short.

V to be pronounced as French u in " du." We have no equivalent

sound in English the y sound in such words as " sympathy " will do
fairly well. It should be noted that when a Greek word is transliterated
into English, v always becomes ^, for examples take the words " sym:

pathy," " hydropathic."

The form

of the

Greek capital

reason being that our letter

letter

is

just like our letter Y, the

Y is derived from

the Greek through the

Latin.

The student

will

probably find

it

convenient and almost necessary

to adopt the usual English pronunciation as things are.

The matter

is

not one of vital importance.

be noticed that two forms are given for the letter aused when the letter occurs at the beginning or in the
middle of a word, the second when it occurs at the end.
(2)

the

It will

first

is

The pronunciation

of Diphthongs

Diphthongs are sounds produced by two vowels being sounded

they are generally sounded as follows in England
ai to be pronounced as ai in " aisle."
to be pronounced as ei in " height.''
ot to be pronounced as oi in "oil."
av to be pronounced as aw in " caw."
ov to be pronounced as ow in " cow."
v to be pronounced as " you."
VI to be pronounced as wi in " wipe."
It would be more correct to pronounce av like ow in " cow," and ov

together

like 00 in " loose."

12

CONSONANTS
Classification of Consonants, for reference only
Consonants are divided into three groups

Mdtes, or

(1)
^1

'Tj

7j X,

fi, ./,

(t>>

T,

8,

which cannot be sounded by themselvef

6.

Semi- Vowels, or letters which have some sound of their own

(2)
X,

letters

p, a.

Double Letters,

(3)

sonants.

^,

f,

or letters

which are made up of two con

i^.

The Mdtes are again subdivided according to the part of the voca
organs used in producing them
:

Gutturals, or letters produced

(a)

in the throat (Latin "guttur"]

"^ 7. X-

Labials, or letters produced by the lips (Latin "labia")

(6)
ff,

ft 0.
(c)

r,

Dentals, or

letters

produced by the teeth (Latin "dens")

8, 6.

The Semi- Vowels

(a)

Liquids.

(6)

Spirant,

X,

are divided into

/i,

v, p.

a-.

Exercise
(1)

Write out the English alphabet and give the Greek equivalen

for each letter as far as possible.

(2)

each

Write out the Greek alphabet with the English equivalent

letter.

These exercises should be repeated

many

times until perfect.

fo

BREATHINGS AND ACCENTS

LESSON

II

BREATHINGS, ACCENTS, IOTA SUBSCRIPT

It will be noticed that there is

alphabet.

The want

no sign

of such a sign

breathings, one of which

is

is

for the letter

A in the Greek

made up by the marks

called

written over every vowel or diphthong that

The rough breathing (turned like the opening comma

commas) is sounded like our letter h, 6 is pronounced " ho,"
indicates that the
A is pronounced "ha." The smooth breathing
vowel is to be sounded without the rough h sound. If the word begins
begins a word.

'

in inverted

'

with a diphthong, the breathing is placed over the second vowel, and
not over the first ovtos not ovtos. p at the beginning of a word
generally has a rough breathing.
pp in the middle of a word is sometimes written pp.
Accents are marks invented by Aristophanes of Byzantium about
200 B.O. in order to teach foreigners the correct pronunciation of Greek.
They were not written in the ancient manuscripts. They denoted
musical pitch and not stress, and no use of them is made now as a
guide to correct speech. The student who is pressed for time is
recommended not to trouble about the accents except in the case of
verbs.

They are chiefly of use to distinguish certain words which differ

only in accent.
list of these together with a brief account of the
principles of accentuation is given in the appendix.
The student however must on no account neglect the breathings,

but must write and pronounce them carefully.

A small I is often written under the letters a, ij, m especially when
one of these letters ends a word. It is called the Iota Subscript and
It is not pronounced, but it
is a relic of an ancient diphthong.
must always be written. All the other letters in a Greek word are
pronounced.

yy

is

pronounced "ng," iyyi^a "engizo."

EXERCISES
Sxercise 2
Write out the following

in

Greek

letters inserting breathings where

word denotes a
The English letter h
rough breathing. The vowels e and o are marked with a stroke ovei
the line when they are long ; when not marked they are short. Care
must be taken to use the proper Greek letter for them.
at the beginning of a

necessary.

The

letter i in brackets denotes that

subscript

is

to be written

under the preceding vowel. Use small letters throughout.

en arche(i) gn ho logos, kai ho logos en pros ton theon, kai theos
6n ho logos, houtos en en arche(i) pros ton theon. panta di autou
egeneto kai choris autou egeneto oude hen ho gegonen. en auto(i) zoe
kai to phos en t6(i) skotia(i)
en, kai hs zoB gn to phos ton anthropon.
phainei, kai he skotia auto ou katelaben. egeneto anthrSpos apestalmenos para theou, onoma auto(i) ioanes. houtos elthen eis marturian,
hina marturese(i) peri tou photos, hina pantes pisteusSsin di autou. ouk
en ekeinos to phos, all hina marturesS(i) peri tou photos, en to phSs to
alethinon ho photizei panta anthropon erchomenon eis ton kosmon.
en td(i) kosmo(i) en, kai ho kosmos di autou egeneto, kai ho kosmos
auton ouk egno. eis ta idia elthen, kai hoi idioi auton ou parelaboa.
hosoi de elabon auton edoken autois exousian tekna theou genesthai,
tois pisteuousin eis to onoma autou, hoi ouk ex haimaton oude ek
thelematos sarkos oude ek thelematos andros all ek theou egennethesanj
kai ho logos sarx egeneto kai eskenosen en hemin, kai etheasametha ten
doxan autou, doxan hos monogenous para patros pleres charitos kai
aletheias.

The student may correct his exercise by comparing it with the first
14 verses of the 1st chapter of St John in the Bible Society's (Nestle's):
Greek Testament. This exercise should be done several times until
perfect.

Write out the Greek of St John

Read

as

much

i.

19-28 in English characters.

as possible of the Greek Testament aloud, paying

and the length of the vowels.

Students who are working alone and who have no one to whom they
can read aloud are recommended to put portions of the Greek into
English letters, and to put them back into Greek letters after an
interval.
It is most important to be able to read the characters
accurately and quickly before proceeding further.
great attention to the breathings

1st singular

THE GREEK PRESENT

Greek the person and number of the subject of the verb are already
made sufficiently clear by the variable ending, and so there is no neea
to add a personal pronoun unless special emphasis is required.
It will be found that this principle applies to all forms of the:
verbs.
It will be noticed that two English equivalents are giveu for the
one Greek form of the Present tense. This is because there are more
tenses in English than in Greek, and one Greek tense has to do the
work of two EngUsh tenses.
The first form given in English above is called the Present
the second is called the Present
Indefinite, or Present Simple
;

Continuous.

The Greek Present corresponds more closely in meaning to the

English Present Continuous than to the Present Simple.
In the forms of the Present Continuous tense will be noticed
another difierence between English and Greek, namely that in English
we freely employ Auxiliary or helping verbs to form our tenses (in this
case the present tense of the verb " to be " is used) while in Greek a
single

word

is

used.

In spoken English we now never use the 2nd person singular in

addressing a single person, but always the 2nd person plural.
In Greek the 2nd person singular is always used in addressing a
single person, and the 2nd person plural is kept for addressing more
than one person. In these exercises when " thou " is written in English
the 2nd person singular must be used in Greek, and when "ye," or
"you" is written the 2nd person plural must be used in Greek, unless
an indication is given to the contrary.
In translating the Greek Testament it is better to use the 2nd person
singular of the English verb when the 2nd person singular is used in
Greek.

Exercise 3
Learn Vocabulary 1, p. 122. The words given in this and the
following vocabularies are all words which occur frequently in the

New Testament. The student should make a habit of carefully

mastering all the words in the vocabularies as he goes along, as
this will save much subsequent labour.
The words given in brackets

CONTRACTED VERBS

after the English meanings of the words are words derived from
the Greek words. They are intended to help the learner to remember

The Greek words

them.

are also transliterated in

the

first

few

vocabularies.

Give the English for

\4yei, \4yofifv, Xiyovtri, \4yfTe, Xiyiis.

(TKO^eVf ypd<j}ij /SaXXert, d7ro6vr}(TKi,

etTOLOJ, a7roo"TeX\ov(7(,

/yXeTretff,

eipi-

yeLpQV(n, Kpivere^ ^dWop.v,

aKOuoutrt, Xa/ijSai/erc, tra^ofiev, fiivei.

Give the Greek for we say, they say, thou sayest, ye say, he says,
they are saying, she is saying, you say, they are dying, he dies, I am
throwing, she arises, we judge, thou art remaining, I am throwing, ye
judge, he sends, yoxi are writing, thou art eating, he finds, we are taking,
they look, she hears.
:

LESSON IV
THE PRESENT INDICATIVE OF CONTRACTED
VERBS IN

fco

When certain vowels come together in the same word they unite
and form a diphthong, or a single long vowel.
This is called " contraction."
There are many verbs whose stems end in e, and, when the personal
endings are added to such stems, contraction takes place.
coming before another c becomes .
(

coming before o becomes ov.

coming before a long vowel, or a diphthong, drops

The present
follows

jtense of the verb

(^iXc'a>

"I love"

out.

is

conjugated as

^iXS

I love, or I

Thou

He, she, or

We love,
You

am

lovest, or
it

or

love, or

They

loving.

thou art loving.

loves, or is loving.

we are

loving.

you are

love, or

loving.

they are loving.

SECOND DECLENSION NOUNS IN

10

05

Exercise 4
Learn Vocabulary

2.

Ka\a,
XaXoviiCv, aiTfir, rripovai, iroifire, napaKoKel, fiaprvpova-i, (rfTfiTf,
6fa>povp,ev, Trjpeis.

he asks, thou callest, we bear witness, they speak, you

she makes, you behold, we love, they call, she asks,
we seek, they bear witness, he beholds.

They

keep

seek,

safe, I exhort,

LESSON V
NOUNS OF THE SECOND DECLENSION ENDING IN
Nouns

or

of the Second Declension ending in or in the Nominative:

case are dechned as follows.

Name

They

are nearly all Masculine.

of Case

Singular

Plural

noun given above brings before us again the

between English and Greek mentioned in Lesson III, namely
that it is often necessary to employ two or more words in English
where one sufl&ces in Greek. The various modifications of meaning!
which are expressed in Greek by adding case endings to the noun are
expressed in English by placing a preposition before the noun, or by
altering the order of the words in the sentence.
The only noun

The

declension of the

difference

The Iota Subscript

of the second declension

ie
:

always written under the m of the Dative Singular

not sounded.

it is

NOMINATIVE AND ACCUSATIVE

11

endings which remain in English are the 's and s' of the Possessive
ease, and the s or other ending added to make the plural.
For example, if we want to show that a word is the subject of a
sentence, we nearly always put it before the verb, while the word which
is the object of the sentence is placed
after the verb.
If we invert the order of the words, we invert the meaning of the
sentence.

In the sentence

"An

angel finds a man," the word "angel"

subject of the sentence, and the

word

is

the

man " the object.

"A man finds an angel" "man"

"

On the other hand in the sentence

the subject of the sentence, and " angel " the object.
We have inverted the order of the words, and, in so doing,
also inverted the meaning of the sentence.
is

In Greek the

first

sentence should be written

ayyeXos

and that SvBptonov

is

evpltTKei avOptoirov,

We show that ayyeKos is the

case,

we have

subject by putting
the object by putting

it

in the

it

Nominative

in the Accusative

case.

In Greek the meaning of the sentence is still the same if we invert

the order of the words and write avdpiowov fvpLa-Kei ayyeXos, because in

Greek it is not the order of the words, but the case form, which decides
which word is the subject or object.

RULES
(1)

(2)

The subject of a Finite' verb is in the Nominative case.

The direct object of a Transitive verb is in the Accusative

case.

Before translating an English sentence into Greek

know which word

is

it is

the subject of the verb, and which

necessary to
is its

direct

has one.
The subject can always be found by putting "who?" or "what?"
before the verb.
In the first sentence given above " An angel finds a man," we ask
" Who finds ?" The answer is " an angel." " An angel " is therefore
the subject of the sentence.
In the same way we can easily see that " a man " is the subject of
object, if it

the second sentence.

1

A Finite verb

is

a verb in any

mood

but the Infinitive.

SUBJECT AND OBJECT

12

We

can find the direct Object by placing " whom 1 " or " what ?
In the case of the first sentence we say " an angel finds
whom?" Answer "a mau." Therefore "a man" is the object of the
after the verb.

sentence.

Many

verbs such as the verb " I remain " cannot have a direct
Verbs which cannot have a direct object are called Intranverbs, because the action which they denote does not pass over

object.
sitive

to

some other person

or thing (Latin " transire

").

Verbs which can have a direct object are called Transitive verbs,
because the action which they denote passes over to another person or
thing.

which English verbs are Transitive and which are

by making a sentence containing the verb and seeing if a

It is easy to find

Intransitive

direct object can be put after

it,

or not.

All verbs agree with their subject in number and person.

(3)
As all nouns are in the third person it is obvious that all verbs
which have a noun for a subject must be in the third person.
If the subject of the verb is a noun in the singular number, the
verb will be in the third person singular if the subject of the verb is
a noun in the plural number, or two or more nouns joined together by
;

" and," the verb will be in the third person plural.

Examples

Men

avBpaiwoi, c(rBlov<nv Sprov.

eat bread.

man and a slave eat bread.

Indefinite Article " a " is not translated into Greek.

HvBpiairos Kal 8ov\os ea-Blovcriv Sprov.

The English

Exercise 5
Learn Vocabulary
1.

nvBpai'rros

ypdcjxi,.

4.

12.

2.

iyeipeis dovXoi'.

^XfTTfi oiKOvs.
9.

3.

fX" ^ovKovs.

7.

avBpanos

SoCXoj e^ft Kvpiov.

avBpanos Koi bovKoi

A man hears

5.

SyyeXos \a6v

(rwfei.

(iTrooTeXXet a8iK(j}ovs.

10.

3.

Kvpios Xoyovs

a.v6pa>voi obov fvpio-KOvm.

evpiiTKop.ev

686v.

8.

11.

6.

SoCXos

Xa/i/Savcrf olkov.
rrjpfiTe

v6p.ovs.

evpi(TKOviriv abe\<j}ovs.

angel.
2. An angel rouses a man.
3. Slaves
brother has a house.
5.
Lords send slaves.
6. They are writing words.
7. You find an angel.
8.
lord judges
men. 9. We rouse slaves. 10. Thou keepest laws.
11.
man and
an angel see the way. 12. Thou beholdest death.
1.

find a way.

4.

an

GENITIVE AND DATIVE.

THE ARTICLE

13

LESSON VI
USE OF THE GENITIVE AND DATIVE CASES.
THE DEFINITE ARTICLE
The Genitive Case can generally be translated into English by the
use of the Preposition " Of," or by the Possessive Case, formed by
adding 's to the noun.
Example

o'koj

avBpanov means, "a house of a man," or "a man's

house."
or

The commonest use of the Dative Case is

For whom anything is done. It is used
meaning "to

object after verbs

Examples

He

to denote the person

To

to express the indirect

give," etc.

writes ]a,ws for a people.

ypa^ii

He

v6}JlOVS

Xa^.

gives a house to a

In the last sentence oIkov

the indirect object, because it

man.

the direct object, and av6pd>ira

not directly affected by the action of

is called
is

the verb.

The
The

Definite Article

Definite Article

which corresponds to the English "the" is

The forms that go with words like

declined in Greek like a noun.

Xdyor are as follows

Singular. N.

A.

TOV

G.

TOV

D.

TM

Plural.

N.

It will be noticed that the endings except the Nominative Singular

are the same as the endings of Xdyor.
The definite article is always in the same case and number as the

noun

to

which

Examples

it is

joined.

Of the man, toO dvdpanov. To the men, tois dvBpairois.

"The man's house" is generally written in the following
order

6 toO av6pa>7rov oikos.

SECOND DECLENSION NEUTER NOUNS

14

Exercise 6
Revise Vocabularies
01

1.

SoCXoi TTOiova-iv 686v

3.

dyyeXovs.

t^

roiis d8eX</)ovs.

5.

TOV TOV 6fov \6yov.

vo/iov.

ypd4>oiiev rovs vo^oui

fj;reiTe

7.

9.

Xap.pdvop.ev tov vopov

oi

2.

Kvpitf.

ypa(^ t&v tov Kvpiov^

^Xfirci TOV oiKov.

10.

1, 2, 3.

4.

avdpanoi

r^ Xam.

CrjTOXKTiv rois

SovXm

o tov
6.

d8e\(j)6s

6^ 6e6s

(jyiKel

Tqpovaiv
8.
tov rSi/ avBpairav d8e\<f>6v.
01 SoOXoi eipia-KOva-iv ttjv 686v toIs Kvpiois.

Ta

KOtrpa.

11.

XaXS rois Xoyoui tw Xaa,

icai

d Xaos Trtoreuet.
2. They are writing the laws for the
angel finds the men.
"We are seeking the brothers of the slave. 4. The lord's
6. You behold the
5. The slave remains.
slaves are making a way.
house of God 2. 7. "We keep the law of the Lord. 8. They write

The

1.

people.

3.

We

10. The man

find a way for the people.
9.
for the slaves.
11. The man and the slave are making
saves the slave's brother.
13. The angel writes laws for the
12. The brethren believe.
bread.

words

world.

LESSON

VII

NEUTER NOUNS OF THE SECOND DECLENSION

In English all nouns denoting men or male animals are in
Masculine gender all nouns denoting women or female animals
in the Feminine gender all other nouns are Neuter.
But in Greek the rule is not so simple.
Nearly all nouns denoting men or male animals are Masculine,
nearly all those denoting women or female animals are Feminine
other nouns may be either Masculine, Feminine, or Neuter.
gender is generally decided by the ending.

the
are

and
but

The

1 When Kipios is written with a capital letter it meana " The Lord "
it
sometimea haa the definite article and sometimes not. It is the word used
in the Greek Version of the Old Teatament to denote the aaored name
;

Jehovah.
'

Beds generally haa the definite article in Greek, but not in Engliah.

GENDER AND TERMINATIONS

15

In the Second Declension nearly all nouns ending in os in the

Nominative singular are Masculine 6S6s " a way," epij^oy " a desert,"
irapBevos " a maiden," which are Feminine, are some of the few excep;

tions to this rule.

All nouns ending in ov in the Nominative singular are Neuter.

The declension of these neuter nouns is given below.

Note that the Nominative, Vocative and Accusative

same ending. This is the case with all neuter nouns.
Declension of epyov " a work."
Singular. N.

epyov

cases have the

FIRST DECLENSION FEMININE

16
1.

NOUNS

They take the garments of the men. 2. We send the

3.
The angel receives the books for the people.

children.

brother's
4.

The

6. Thou
5. He beholds the face of God.
hast the sheep. 7. You find the trees. 8. The Lord judges the works
10. God works miracles (does signs)
of men. 9. We seek the temple.
12. The children
for the people.
11. The man seeks the young child.
eat the loaves.
13. Thou keepest the money safe.

children have the garments.

'

LESSON

VIII

FEMININE NOUNS OF THE FIRST DECLENSION

Nouns

of the First Declension ending in a or

singular are declined as follows.

They are

all

r/

in the Nominative

feminine.

THE DEFINITE ARTICLE

17

NOUNS OF THE FIRST DECLENSION

18
71

ADJECTIVES OF THE SECOND DECLENSION

19

the lake with the Baptist. 9. You send the children out of the house.
10. For the church does not hear the commandments and the promises
12. For
of the prophet.
11. They call the disciples to the assembly.

God

writes the

commandments

in the hearts of the disciples.

13.

The

young men hear the parables of the kingdom.

LESSON X
ADJECTIVES OF THE SECOND DECLENSION.
THE PRESENT TENSE OF THE VERB "TO BE"
Adjectives of the Second Declension are declined as follows

dyaSos "good."

Masc
Sing.

Plur.

Note that the Masculine endings are the same as those of 2nd
Declension uouns in os. The Feminine endings are the same as those
as
of 1st Declension nouns in q. The Neuter endings are the same
those of 2nd Declension nouns in ov.
the endings of
If a vowel or the letter p comes immediately before
those of
an adjective, the endings in the Feminine are the same as
fjficpa.

Example:

Syos "holy."
&yia

ayiov

dyia

aytov

dyiap

ayiov

dyias

dyiov

dylq

dyia

22

AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES.

20

elfJii

RULE
Adjectives agree with the noun which they qualify in number,
gender, and case.
Note. An adjective preceded by an article is practically equivalent
6 irpSyros "the first" (man)
to fo-p^ara "the last things";
to a noun.
ol ayiot "the holy'' (men) or "the
a'l dyadai "the good" (women);
;

saints."

The Present

Indicative of the verb " to be "

is

as follows

Singular
fljii

2nd

(t

thou art

3rd

The verb

Plural

am

1st

foTiiy) he, she, or it is

ia-iiev

we

eVre

you are

el(ri{v)

they are

are

" to be " belongs to a class of verbs called " Copulative

Verbs " because they serve to couple or link together two nouns or a
noun and an adjective. Such verbs cannot make a statement by
themselves, but must be followed by a noun or an adjective to make
a complete predicate. This noun or adjective is called a predicative
noun or adjective, or the complement. These predicative noims or
adjectives are not put in the Accusative case like the object of a
transitive verb, because they are not objects.

in the

same case

They must always be

as the subject of the verb, and, in the case of

predicative adjectives, they

and gender as
This rule

is

must agree with the subject

in

number

well as case.

sometimes stated in

this

form

RULE
The verb
Examples

" to
:

be

"

takes the same case after

it

as before

it.

IMPERFECT INDICATIVE
You

21
just

are
BiKatoi 4tTTe

The tongue

is

evil

yXatro'd

ea-Ti

KUKr]

Note. The various parts of the verb " to be " given above should
not be placed as the first words in a sentence.

Exercise 10
Learn Vocabulary
1.

^aaiKeta
jQavoufft
7.

7.

KK\r]<rla ttutti] eartv*

rj

4.

etrri kukiJ.

TO

rj

tdta ip^axta.

rKva ayairryrd

ea^aros Trp&Tos.

master.

different

man

7.

He makes

is

11.

ayLos

13.

The brethren

good,

tov Qeov.

The

ei,

ra npara

We

Upa.

12.

are prophets.

own garments.

We

remain

The man

8.

Kal 6
10.

iiadrjTai

Thou

3.

writings of the Apostles are holy.

6.

TrXola,

eaxoros,

ea'Ttv

rj

Xa/x-

Ka\ovp.v Toiis erepovs veavias.

14.
2.

3.

5.

rd dyia o-d^^ara tov deov.

Kvpte.

in the last boat.

his

npSyros

ai iriOTaX fievova-iv iv TO)

are disciples.

4.

8.

ol dyiol rrjpovaLV

yXatra-a vovr^pd iariv.

1.

erepot avOpaiTOi p,4vovcnv iv

6.

etrfiev

9.

eare tov Kvplov.

ol avdpciTTot jrpo<l>TlTaL elatv.

2.

evToXrj tov alcoviov deov SiKola iariv,

5.

art

in the evil world.

is

just

and good.

10. The saints

Therefore the Baptist exhorts the evil men.
11. God keeps the souls of the
remain before the house of God.
saints.
12. Ye exhort the disciples.
9.

LESSON XI
THE IMPERFECT INDICATIVE ACTIVE.
ACCENTUATION OF VERBS
All past tenses of the Indicative

which

is called

Augment
fXtyoi'.

with

is

the Augment.

mood

are preceded

by the

simply placed before the verb Present, Xiya ; Imperfect

vowel the Augment combines
:

If the verb begins with a

it.

t,

letter t

If the verb begins with a consonant the

o,

before a becomes

before

becomes

77,
i;

(except in the verb

V are lengthened into

1,

a>,

v.

ex"")'

THE AUGMENT

22

diphthong lengthens

its first

m becomes
01

Examples

becomes
Present
UKOVO)

r/,

9,

vowel

becomes t;,
and ev becomes

ei

tjv.

Imperfect

<l}l\0VV

24

EXERCISES
But,

if
'

contract
^iXeVi

',

the grave comes before the acute on the syllables which

the acute remains alone. Examples <j!)iXtofiej' = (^'Xoi3^ej(i^
:

= (^(X. But

f<^tX

= <^iXei,

<^iXr<B

= (^iXiV<.

Exercise 11
Learn Vocabulary
1.

dyyeXovs

ts

rov K6<r[iov,

3.

^ajrri'ffi

<rvv Tots 8ov\ois.

Toi/s

12.

dvOpanovs,

oi ayaflol

9.

'Imai'ijf d iSoTTTiOT^S c/cpa^c

oSv

ttjs 6a\d(r(rrjs.

4.

ot

5.

eSo^a^ov t6v Kvpiov.

/ladijToi

10.

d tffor eireinre tovs

2.

^ye^ tovs fMadrjras diro

ra npo^ara virrfyov^ ex T^s e'pf}p.ov. 6. d /Sairrtor^t

8. oi
7. 6 ayye\os dwiXve tov anoaroXov.
Tas jrapdfvovs.

Vfaviai eyfaipov.

Ta

8.

ciireKTciveTe rois irpoiprjTas tov Kvpiov.

iv

Trj

SofXoi e(J3fpov

eptiprp.

11.

Kr)pva'aofiev to eiiayyeXtov T(p

14.

wpofiaTa.

to.

eSiSaa-Kes ra iraiSia

\aa.

irepifiraTovfiev iv rio f^/J^.

13.
15.

tireiBov

e^e^aXKes

BaifiQvia.

1.
They proclaimed the Gospel to the disciples. 2. The maidens
departed from the house. 3. They dragged (dya>) the slave's boat to
the sea. 4. The prophets used to teach the children in the houses.
5. Ye glorified the Lord,
angels.
6. Thou wast teaching the people.

7. They were driving the sheep together to the trees.

8. The child
was reading the scriptures in the temple. 9. We were departing from
the lake. 10. John the Baptist did not work signs. 11. The Lord
walked about in the wilderness.
12. Therefore you persuaded the
people.
13. The saints were rejoicing.
14. He was casting out devils.

We

15.

were carrying the boat.

16.

You were

loosing the slaves.

the accent falls on the last syllable but one of any word in which the
but one is long, and the last syllable short, the acoeut is always
circumflex.
^ The accent never goes back beyond the augment.
1

If

last syllable

IMPERFECT OF

etflL

DEMONSTRATIVES

25

LESSON XII
THE IMPERFECT OF THE VERB "TO BE."
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS, airos
The Imperfect

tense of the verb " to be " is as follows

Singular
1.

rjiirfv

2.

rjs,

3.

fjv

(Jiv,

Tj)

^o-da

I was
thou wast
he was

The Demonstrative Pronouns

declined as follows

Plural

1.

rjfi.(v

2.

rjTe

we were
you were

3.

rjirav

they were

oiros " this "

and

infivos " that " are

''"

ovTo?, Kecvo<;, avrov

oUtos and exfij/or agree with the nouns which they qualify in
number, gender, and case just like adjectives. When they qualify a
noun the noun always has the article.

Examples
This man, oStos 6 avdpairos, or 6 avdpmiros oStos,
Those sheep, iKeiva to. irpo^ara, or ra npo^ara eKfiva.

That commandment,

When

exeivrj

fj

ivroki), or

i)

ivroXri

eieeivri.

without any word expressed for it to

agree with it means "this man," aun? means "this woman," rovro
means "this thing,'' rara means "these things."
The same is the case with eKcivos.
avTos, avTT), airo is declined like inctvos.
In the New Testament it
is the ordinary word for " he, she, it " etc.
ovTos stands

Examples

by

itself

For he saves the people.

avTos yap ormffj tov \a6v.

They were
avTov

Tjyov

He was
67rf/t7rei/

leading
els Trjv

him

to the sea.

dakaairav.

sending her from the temple.

avrfjv otto

This

is

OVTOS

(TTt.v

tov iepov.

his slave.
6 bovKos aVTOV^.

Those are her houses.

QVTOL

avTos also

eltriv

ol olkol ai/rrjs^.

means "himself,

herself, itself"

when connected with

noun.

Example

Jesus himself taught them.

:-

Irjo-ovs aiiTos

edldaaicev avrovs.

(In Classical Grnek the nominative case of airos has this latter

meaning
1

If a

or "its,"

only,

noun
it

and cannot be used in the sense of "he,

is

followed by a genitive of

always has an

article.

aMs

she,

it.")

in the sense of " his, her,"

THE PASSIVE

EXERCISES.

27

Sxercise 12
Revise Vocabularies 18.
1.

ovTot ol av6poj7roi airiByrifTKOv ev

oiKovs avTwv.

yap doSXoi
6.

3.

TTJS ifiaprias.

irXolaj,

(the evil one).

Kpivofiev ravTa.
VTo\rf avTov^

10.

12.

ot

16.

15.

ai

ev eKeivji

01 jiadrjTal

rfj

airov.

edeapovfiev tovs

2.

ravra ev

eV CKfivrj

irapBivoi &vvTJyov

&pq

exalpop,ev.

18.

ij

fa)?;

yap 3ebs

avrov ^aav

viol

14.

7.

e^aWov

fls tijk

KaKoL
rrj

eSd^afov

ra vpo^ara avrSiv

17.

rjijLev

diro tov

9.

ov yap

yap

avrrj

11.

rjv

Tyjv o'ocfyiav

els

tj

fKetvot Se

13.

eKKXTjtTLa.

Tjj rjjiepq

4.

doKaaaav,

trwfet avrovs

^re oZv Sea-n-orai tov Xaov.

8.

eKr]pva-(ropev

e^ejSaXXov ra Satfiovta.

Kvpiov.

ineiva Si to SivSpa

5.

tm

avTOt epevov ev

TTOvrjpov

eprj^a.

ttj

ovTOs ovv ^v fiadrjT^s *lcodvov rod ^aTrrtaTov,

tov

ra bivSpa.

d 'lijo-oOs avTos ovk efidirniev

dXKd

jucvei ev avTois.

1.
In the beginning was the word. 2. This is the love of God.
For the Lord saves the souls of men from the evil one. 4. Peace
and truth are in the kingdom of God. 5. They were glorifying his
power and wisdom. 6. For in that day we were preaching the gospel
of the kingdom in the synagogue, and casting out devils.
7. You saw

3.

her sons in the house.

8.

We

received

them

into the boat.

9.

Ye

were in the temple in those days. 10. This is life eternal. 11. We
heard the voice of the angel from the trees. 12. They were holy and
14. Thou wast
beloved.
13. Their children were in the assembly.
reading the scripture to them in the synagogue.
15. The Jews used
to slay his prophets.
16. The Baptist himself used to baptise his
disciples.

LESSON

XIII

THE PASSIVE VOICE OF THE PKESENT AND IMPEEFECT

INDICATIVE

A verb is
of as p,cting

said to be in the Active Voice

it is

when

its

said to be in the Passive Voice

subject

when

its

is

spoken of as suffering, or being acted upon.

Examples

spoken

subject

Active " I love," " I was striking."

Passive "I am loved," "I was being struck."

is

THE INDICATIVE PASSIVE

28
N.B.

Only Transitive verbs can have a Passive

voice.

There

are

certain verbs such as " I fall," " I slip," etc. which do not speak of the
subject as acting, but which are regarded as Active verbs because they

are Intransitive.

The Passive
special endings,

voice is formed in Greek, as in Latin, by the use

and not by the use of the Auxiliary verb " to be " as

of
in

English.
voice of the Present and Imperfect Indicative of \va
Note that the Imperfect Passive has the Augment.

The Passive
given below.

is

Present Indicative Passive

Sing.

Plur.

I.

Xvofuu

2.

Xiei,

3.

XicTM

am loosed,

Thou

or Xir/

He

or I

am

art loosed, or

is loosed,

or he

1.

\v6iie6a

We are loosed,

2.

\iea-6e

You

3.

\vovTai

They are

or

being loosed.

thou art being

is

we

loosed.

being loosed.
are being loosed.

are loosed, or you are being loosed.

loosed, or they are being loosed.

Imperfect Indicative Passive

Sing.

Plur.

was being loosed.

1.

eXvofiriv

2.

eXvov

Thou wast being

3.

fXiero

He was

1.

iXvo/ieSa

We

2.

eXvea-Be

Tou were

3.

eXvovTo

They were being

loosed.

being loosed.

were being loosed.

being loosed.
loosed.

Note. As in the case of the active voice a simple Past tense 'I was
loosed " etc. will often sufficiently translate the Imperfect.
'

The Present and Imperfect

Indicative Passive of verbs in ea are

conjugated as follows

Present Indicative Passive

(j>i.\oviiai

AGENT AND INSTRUMENT

Imperfect Indicative Passive
e<j)L\ov[jirjv

29

AGENT AND INSTRUMENT.

30

PREPOSITIONS

RULE
In Greek the Agent of the action of a Passive verb is
expressed by vv6 with the Genitive the Instrument is expressed
by the Dative alone'.
Active verbs may also be followed by a word denoting the instru:

ment.

Example

He

kills

the apostle with a sword.

dnoKTeivfi tov aTTOiTToXov

fia)(^aipa.

The same verb may have both an Agent and an Instrument.

Example
The apostle is loosed by the angel by a word.
:

6 diToa-ToXos \verat inro tov

The Prepositions

8td

and

may

/xci-a

ayyeXov Xoytp.

be followed by a noun

or

pronoun either in the Accusative or Genitive case.

The student should here refer to the Appendix on prepositions
on p. 154. The preposition vpos is generally followed by an AccuFor the
sative case, and the preposition vtto by a Genitive case.

meanings of these prepositions see the vocabulary.

Exercise 13
Learn Vocabulary
cVe/iTTCo'^e viro

1.

Ta

TOTTft)

9.

rav bL^aaKoKav

iBeapovfiev Tols oCJidaXpois tov

Trpbs erepov oxXov,

Kvpwv

\6yoi iXoKovvTO vno TOiV aTrocrrdXajv irpos

7rpo<j)TjTav

Xoyoif.

/xera

7.

o^ov.

dia tov

irpea^vrlpayv.

Tavra

ol Tfkatvai

ol vio\

8.

6.

direaTeWov tovs

Trj

iv (Keivco

Tas rjpepas

xpova).

ol

eSiddaKOVTo pTa twv veavtStv virb Tav

otKta tov Kvpiov

14.

ev

10.

9.

St

6p6vos eVoieiTO.

11.

lepovaaXrjp..

ol

12.

epyaTiu
St

*Upov-

irapcKoXoviifSa Tois \6yois Tatv padjjTav

rjyop,iv tcl

XyaTOi virriyov Trpbs

jMSTa

Kpiratv

tov oiKoBetTTTOTOv ^trOiov tovs dpTovs.

13.

ol

eitdiis

dne(rTeW6p.^da

KapTToiis Trjs yrjs irpos tovs olKodeffwoTas.

(ToKfin, ov)( fvpta-Kfi TrKTTTj.

4.

dta tovto iireidov Tols Tatv

viroKpird, ov irfpiirdTUS iv tols oSoIr tov Kvpiov.

V7rh Tatv epyaTotv

5.

o^Toi

3.

Toiis irpetr^vTepovs.

8e Ta Trpo^ara (rvvrjyTO Xidots vtto Tatv Xr](rT5tv.

t5>v

iv TovTa

2.

Tatv ovpavatv.

tikvo 8ia tov Upov.

15.

per' cKeivai

ti}v eprjpov.

The word of God was being preached by the apostles. 2. These

were sent by the householder to the elders. 3. On this account
the judges were being persuaded by the faithful teachers. 4. Thou
wast leading the people through the wilderness to Jerusalem. 5. After
1.

fruits

'

This rule

is

not always strictly observed in the N.T.

THE IMPERATIVE

DEPONENTS.
this they

were being sought

in the eyes of the Lord.

31

by the crowd. 6. They were wicked

The throne was being carried by the

for

7.

workmen

to another place through the house.

Immediately the
8.
went with the prophets through Jerusalem.
9.
The world
was made through the Son of God. 10. O thou hypocrite, thou dost
not keep the commandments of the Lord. 11. The young men were
being taught by their own teachers. 12. Thou art not sent by the
elders

sons of the prophets.

13. Therefore immediately after these things
we preached the word of God to the disciples. 14. Ye were being

roused by the words of the householder.

LESSON XIV
DEPONENT VERBS. THE PRESENT IMPERATIVE.
THE RELATIVE PRONOUN
are verbs which have the form of the Passive voice
which are translated by a verb in the Active voice in
They are called "Deponent" because the old grammarians
English.
considered that they had "laid aside" (Latin "deponere") a Passive
sense, and assumed an Active.

Deponent verbs

in Greek, but

Examples

THE PKESENT IMPERATIVE

32

Present Imperative Passive

Present Imperative Active

Plur.

2.

XvfTf

loose (ye).

3.

Xviraia-av

let

them loose.

or Xv6vT(ov

The Present Imperative

2.

XvctrOe

3.

\vfa-6aa-av

or

\vfa8a>v

of verbs in fa is as follows

Present Imperative Active

<j)l\l

be loosed (ye).
them be loosed,

let

THE RELATIVE PRONOUN

33

Let him continue to keep the commandments.

TripeiTO)

Do
jXTj

Tas ivToKds.

not walk

ifi

the ways of wickedness any longer.

TTopevov ev rais 68ols

rrjs

aStnias.

The Relative Pronoun

The

Relative Pronoun

is

declined as follows

34

RELATIVE PRONOUNS
Examples

men who

I see the

1.

The men that you

2.

oi

the writing that

is

avTT] effTiv

This

4.

The

kept in the synagogue.

is

^ TTjpeiTai ev Ttj avfayaytj.

ypa<j)T]

fj

the writing which the apostle used to have.

is

avTTj itrrXv
5.

are sending are going away.

avBpairot ots (TTeWere direp^^ovrat.

This

3.

are coming,

Tovs dvdpanovs oi epxovrat.

jSXcTTQ)

7jv

ypa<l>rj

rj

children

whom

6 aTrotrroXos.

ft-x^v

was teaching are going away.

Ta TraiSla a edlddaKov 'aTrtpx^Tai.

The prophet whose books thou

6.

The men

7.

oi dvayivaxTKeis ra

rr po<j)TiTris

for

whom

oi avdpojirot ots noia)

In example

dv6pi)novs

because

it is

ravra 8ov\ot

eltrtv*

it

stands,

oj is in

the subject of the clause in which

The student should

dyios etrriv.

doing this are slaves.

in the Accusative case because it

is

object of the clause in which

am

art reading is holy,

/3(/3Xia

it

stands.

carefully consider the reason for the cases of the

Relative Pronouns in the other examples in the

same way.
grammar

Sections 8 and 10 in the Appendix on English

be read

The

is the

the Nominative case

should

connexion with this lesson.

in

Relative clauses in the examples given above are all Adjectival

and explain their antecedents just

clauses, because they qualify

like

adjectives,

Exercise 14
Learn Vocabulary
1.

10.

iiropevopeSa npos

TOP Kvpiov

86^s

TTJs

ttjv

6a\aor(Tav p,fTa

bs rijpei avTois

TOVS dypois ots eix^v 6 Xabs

5.

drrfipxovTO irpbs

vd/mjv

7-oiy

dyyeXois

Tfjv dbiKtav.

Koi io-6lti ptT

10.

ol

8.

tt)v

eprjpov

oJ rjpxovTO

ovToi

abrSjv.

'la-parjX.

4.

jifi

liadrjrav,

novrjpov.

diroKpivov

airrov

irpeo-^vTepav.

ApapraiXovs

T&V

Kf<j}aXSiv

2.

3.

ev ^ 6 'ladvrjs e/3d7rTife.

dno t&v

Sf^*''"'" '"'"^r

9.

T&v

dvo tov

7.

tm
6.

rjpvoiivto

eScxea-Bt'

Seo-wdrj.

dwfKpi-

pj) epyd^ttrSe

epxovTai npos avTon

T&v waiSiav & ntpno,
oi

SoiXoi ots eSfX^TO epya^ovTai ev toIs dypois.

11.

dirotrreXXoVTM.

PRESENT INFINITIVES
TO

ifidrta

a Xaji^avovaiv

6 airoaToXos.

KHKOl

14.

fls

tov oIkov.

KOI KOVTjpoX bovkoi ^Te.

iepov o aKoSopeiTO

be^^cda to ^i^Kiov

12,

8irjp^6ie6a ovv Toiis

13.

35
o ypa(j)ci

dypavs airaiv fierd tcov reXaivav,

15.

Xtdav TOV

&VTi<r6<oiTav tS>v

t Kvpia.

Let the love of the brethren remain in their hearts. 2. Keep

commandments which you receive from the teachers. 3. Do
not deny the Lord of glory who saved yovi from the evil world. 4. Let
the elders whom they send receive the law for the people. 5. We were
going through the fields in which the slaves were working. 6. After
these things they built a temple to the God of Israel.
7.
Do not
walk (pi.) in the way of sinners. 8. Let him receive the messengers
who proclaim the kingdom of heaven. 9. The disciples whom John
10.
Let them work the
was baptising remained in the wilderness.
works of him that sent them. 11. For the prophet receives the sinners
12.
Do not answer the
who are sent to him and eats with them.
teacher.
13. After those days they went away into the place in which
the young men were remaining with the sheep. 14. This is the elder
whose children were reading the books of the law which the prophet
1.

the holy

wrote.

LESSON XV
THE PRESENT INFINITIVE.
PERSONAL AND POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS
The Present

Infinitives are as follows

Present Infinitive Active

to loose

\iea-dai

to be loosed

<j>iKiiv

to love

(/)i\o-flat

to be loved

fivai

The

Present Infinitive Passive

\veiv

so-called Infinitive

Mood

to be
is really,

both in Greek and English,

Dative case of a verbal noun. In many of its uses however its

Dative sense is quite forgotten, and it is treated exactly as if it were
It is always neuter. The Infinitive
in indeclinable verbal noun.
Dartakes of the nature both of a verb and a noun. As a verb it has a
lubjeot expressed or understood, and it may have an object ; it is
the

qualified

by adverbs, and has tense and

voice.

As

a,

noun

it

itand as the subject or object of another verb.

32

may

THE INFINITIVE

36

Infinitive used as a Subject. The Infinitive is especially common

as the subject of an Impersonal verb or of ecrri. As it is a verbal
noun and therefore partakes of the nature of a verb, it may have a
subject of its own.

AocuSAirvB

If this subject is expressed it is

put in

the

case.

Examples

To

err is

human.

n-apa/SaiVew dv6pajrtv6v iari.

It is lawful to heal

on the Sabbath,

effort dtpanevciv iv

ra

It

was necessary

for

(ra^^arif.

him

to pass through Samaria.

&ei avTov SiipxeirBai Bia rrjs Safuipias.

It is good for us to be here.

Ka\6v

i<TTiv fifias etvai fSde.

Notice that in the English of the last three examples the word " it"
first as a sort of preparatory subject, the real subjects of the
three sentences are however the Infinitives " to heal," " to pass," " to
be here,'' as will be seen if the sentences are written in the following
is

placed

form;

To heal on the Sabbath is lawful.

To pass through Samaria was necessary
To be here is good for us.

for him.

In the last two examples the subjects of the Infinitives airov and
expressed in Greek in the Accusative case.
Note that in English these words are in the Dative.
The verb e^eari is however followed by a noun or pronoun in the
Dative case to express the person to whom the action is lawful.

^/iSs are

Example
It is lawful for us to heal

e^eaTiv

fffiiv

on the Sabbath.

depairevetv iv tc5 (ra^^arai.

Infinitive used as Object. Any verb whose action naturally

implies another action or state as its object may take an Infinitive'
as its object.
Such verbs are generally the same in Greek as in
English.

They

Examples:

are sometimes called

They wish

"Modal Verbs."

to remain.

^oiXovrai Kara/iiveiv.
are willing to hear.

We

6i\optv aKOvciv,

IN FINAL CLAUSES
I

am

37

able to do this.

bwajxai TOVTO

They began

TToieiv,

to build.

rjpXOVTO olicohojieiv.

After verbs meaning "to entreat," "to exhort," "to command,"

a' verb in the Infinitive mood is used as the direct object, while a

noun or pronoun
with

it

in

an Accusative, Genitive, or Dative case

as the indirect object of the

Infinitive is expressed it is in

is

main verb. If the subject

the Accusative case.

used

of the

Examples

He commanded them

to bring Paul.

EKcXcuev avTovs ayeiv rbv IlavKov.

I beseech thee to heal

my

son.

deofiai trov Sepaireveiv rov vlov fiov*

He

charged them not to depart from Jerusalem.

TaprjyyeWev avTois fifj virdyuv otto 'lepoffoXu/Kav.

Example

an

of

Infinitive with its subject expressed

He commands
KcXeuei Tov

Paul to be brought.
HavKov SyetrOai,

All clauses which stand as the subject or object of a verb are called

Substantival Clauses.

The Infinitive used in Final clauses. As has been already stated

the Infinitive is really the Dative case of a verbal noun.
It may therefore be used not only as the verb in a Substantival
Clause but also as the verb in an Adverbial Clause expressing Purpose.
Such clauses are called Final Clauses.
The Infinitive is used in Final clauses on the same principle that

a noun in the Dative case

Example

And

is

He went

used in English to express purpose.

to the

market

for corn.

so both in Greek and English the Infinitive

is

used to express

Purpose.

Examples

He

sent his slaves to call the prophets.

dTreoreXXe

roiis

John used
d

'la>di'>;r

SoiXovs KoKeiv tovs 7rpo0i)Tas.

to go to the Jordan to baptise the disciples.

^pxero n-pbs tok ^lophamjv fiairn^eiv tovs

fiaBrfras.

PERSONAL AND

38

The negative used with the

almost always

Infinitive in the

New

Testament

is

/irj.

Summary. The Infinitive is used in Substantival Clauses as

Verbal Noun.
The Infinitive is used in Final Clauses as being the Dative Case

being a

of a verbal noun.

Personal and Possessive Pronouns

The Personal Pronouns

of the 1st

and 2nd persons are as

Singular

follows

01 fiiv

followed by

Examplej

POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS
oi

fit

must be translated "Some... others."

Some remained, but

01 fitv

39

efievov,

As the personal ending

others were going away.

oi bk aiTr)p^ovTO.

of the verb

is

generally sufficient to

what person and number the subject is, the Nominative'case

Personal Pronouns is not used except for emphasis.
Example:

Thou

art a slave, but I

(TV fiev

The

Possessive Pronouns are

e>os
(TOS

am

free.

8ov\os, eyw he eXevdepos.

show

of the

40
r^

THE FUTURE INDICATIVE

'laavfi.

15.

17.

tyw

ail 8e oIk vnaKoveis.

18. oi /lev ^trav SoCXoi
naptKoKovfiev tov "Kaov vwaKOVciv Tois Trpo4>j]Tais.

liivciv,

19.

16.

cKcXevojUcv roiis dyyeXour neiiirtirdat.

^dfXev wopeieirdai ev rais oSois Tov Kvpiov.

<rc

ol

o oe ouk

kcXcvco CKei

8e e\fv6epou

2. They were
1. We must not deny the Lord of glory (use 8el).
not willing to obey the elders'. 3. It is lawful for them to receive the
money from the publicans. 4. I am a man, but you are children.
6. We are sending
5. "We wish to see the temple of the God of Israel.
the slaves to call the blind and the poor to the marriage. 7. It is bad
for them to be there.
8. It was necessary for Jesus to pass through
Samaria to proclaim the Gospel to the people. 9. We commanded the
prophet to be brought. 10. I besought him to heal my child, but he
would not.
11. Jesus commanded them to send the blind man.
12. I am not able to exhort them to remain in Jerusalem.
13. Therefore they began to confess their sins to us.
14. Some went to their
houses and others to the temple. 15. We are free, but you are slaves.
16. Jesus is led into the wilderness to be tempted by the devil.

We

came

be baptized by him in the Jordan. 18. They

19. I sent the messenger to you, but he was
not willing to depart. 20. We must work the works of him that sent
us (use 8fi). 21. They wish to read the books which thou hast.
17.

to

John

to

are not able to do this.

LESSON XVI
THE FUTURE INDICATIVE ACTIVE AND MIDDLE.
THE MIDDLE VOICE
The Future Indicative Active is generally formed in Greek by
putting (T at the end of the stem of the verb, and then adding the
endings of the Present Indicative Active.
The Future Middle is generally formed by putting o- at the end of
the stem of the verb and then adding the endings of the Present
Indicative Passive.

The meaning

of the Middle voice will be explained below.

'

Dat. case.

ACTIVE AND MIDDLE

The Future Active and the Middle

of

Xiito

" I loose " are as follows

Active

Xia-oum

Xva-fis

I shall loose (for

own

\i(rei, Xva-rj

\va-et

Xvo

XvirofjLev

\v(r6fie0a

Xucrere

Xvaecrde

\V(T0V(TI,

XlKFOVTai

Future Infinitive Active

To be about

Xva-eiv

Middle

I shall loose, etc.

Xuo-ffl

41

my

benefit), etc.

Future Infinitive Middle

to loose

To be about
one's own

Xvaea-Sai

to loose (for
benefit)

Note that each of these forms is made up of the stem of the verb,
the <r, and the appropriate ending of the Present tense.
If the stem of the verb ends in a consonant, this consonant
combines with the a- which is added to it to form the endings of the
Futxire in the manner shown below.
If the stem of the verb ends in a guttural letter it, y, Xt it joins
with the (T and makes ^.
Examples
Present

pursue
I open

Future Act.

Future Mid.

dvoia>

dvQi^ofiai

ap^a

ap^ofiai

OKOKta
dvoiyai

Act. I rule

apxa

Mid.

exa

begin

1
I

have
nave

|q>

(but observe the rough

breathing)

stem of the verb ends in a

If the

the

a-

and makes

labial letter

ir, /3,

<(>,

it

joins with

yjf.

Examples

Future Act.

Present

Future Mid.

jSXettoj

see

/SXc'i^m

^Xei/^o/iai

ypa<t>(0

I write

ypo\//'0)

ypayjfO/iai

ncfJLtro)

If the

send

jrefn^m

stem of the verb ends in a dental

before the

<r

letter

ire/ii/ro/iai

r, 8, 6, it is

dropped

of the Future.

Examples
Present
neiOo)

I persuade

Future Act.

Future Mid.

wiiirat

TTcliTopm

THE MIDDLE VOICE

42

Verbs in ea lengthen the

Future Tense.

Examples

to

?;

before adding the endings of the

Present
I

fijreo)

I seek

The Future

Future Act.

Future Mid.

aiT^cra)

airrjiTOfiai,

C^Tr)<ra

CriTTja-oiiai

ask

aireo)

tense of

flfii is

as follows

I shall be, etc.

torofiai

ecnj

etret,

ttrrai

eaovTOi

The Middle
subject

is

The Middle

voice.

acting upon himself, or in

voice generally denotes that the

some way that concerns

himself,

not distinguished from the Active voice in meaning.

Many verbs have no Future Active forms, but only Future Middle.
These Futures Middle are " deponent " and have exactly the same

but often

it is

meaning as

if

they were active.

voice of the Present tense

The Middle

is

the same in form as the

Passive voice.

Exercise 16
Learn Vocabulary
1.

ovK a5iK^O"ou(rt

rovs 6(l>Ba\fiovs rav

reKva,

TV<l>Katv ot

2.

oi

be evdva-ovari ra IfiaTia.

(Tvudyovrai iv

epydras epyd^caSat iv Tols dypois-

Toi/s

Km

12.

rot

wpotpTjras,

dW*

5.

ovk aKovtrovtriv avToi/s

earai

ayms ra Kvpia.

yr^v.

8.

7rpo<pTjTeva'is

7.

tu

deov

ItrparjX,

viol
o\

dvoi^eL

neiaofitv

irpos avTovs trot^vs

6.

l(rparj\.

KOTOiKOvai

Xac5 TovT<fi Kai viraKovtrovtri

fioi,

3.
4.

(rot.

dXX' eya

9.

cKelvos

eKfiViji' Tr\v

8taicovr]a'Tf

eXeij(ro> i/iSs en

10. KaToiKTitTopev Toiis dypoiis tS>v e'xBpSiv ols fiiijKoi/oi/jfK

\6yov tov Kvplov.

X^oras ev ra a-a^^dra.

OTi OVK rjKovofiev tov

8ta}^ov(rt Tovs

a-vvaywy^,

nefi^j^o)

ol

Sphere rav '\ovhaiaiv

Tols i)(Bpois vp,S>v OTi OVK TjSeXfTf vnaKOveiv

CKeivrj Tij Tjpipa.

TJj

13.

12.

ol

BiaKOVOi

ttjs OTJi/aycoy^s ov

cuXo-yeircocrai' ttjv

86^av tov

trep'^opev Toi/s veavlas KaroiKelv t^v y^v.

npS^ara A tra^erai aTTorau

t&v wpotjjrjr&v.

TTpea-^vrepoL e^oviTLTa

v\oye2v rovs viovs

11.

)(dpa)V.

15.

14.

ot

dp^ofifSa

THE TWO STEMS OF VERBS

43

open the books which are in the synagogue. 2. They

and faithful in that day, and I will bless them because
they hear my voice. 3. "We shall behold the face of the Lord in the
temple which is built in Jerusalem. 4. The Lord will have mercy
upon them because they dwell in the land of their enemies, and he
1.

I will

shall be just

them into their own land. 5. Jesus therefore began to send

the apostles to proclaim the Gospel to the house of Israel. 6. We will
send the slaves to pursue the robbers. 7. Peace and truth shall dwell
in our land because we obey the commandments of the Lord.
8. He
will lead

speak these things to the multitudes in parables. 9. I shall be

but thou wilt be last. 10. Do not praise the wicked, for the
wicked shall not dwell in our land.
will

first,

LESSON XVII
THE TWO STEMS OF VERBS.
THE REFLEXIVE PRONOUN. QUESTIONS
Greek verbs are not divided into conjugations with

different endings

like Latin verbs.

All the verbs in

to

have the .same endings

the differences between

them are caused by variations in the stem.

The verbs which are given as examples in the last exercise (except
Treidio) and also those in the vocabulary have but one stem
but many
verbs have at least two stems
The Verbal stem from which all the tenses with the exception
(1)
:

of the Present
(2)

and Imperfect are generally formed.

The Present stem from which the Present and Imperfect

tenses are formed.

The fact that the meanings of verbs are given in dictionaries under
the form of the Present Indicative tends to fix attention upon it, and
to produce the impression that it is the original and most important
form of the verb. This is however not the case. The present stem is
really derived from the verbal stem, and is generally a lengthened
form of the verbal stem.
The verbal stem is the most important part of the verb nouns
;

THE VERBAL STEM

44

and adjectives of kindred meaning are formed from

the present stem.

Examples

it,

and not from

REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS.

45

ai/Vo?

tempt

Pao-Tofw

I carry

n-etpafm

I try or

Sofafo)

I glorify

a-KavSdKi^ai

I cause to

eyyi^a

am^a)

I save

draw near

ipyd^ojxai

stumble

work

Observe that in all the verbs given above the Future is formed
from the verbal stem in accordance with the rules given on p. 41.
Reflexive Pronouns are used when the subject and object of a
sentence or clause refer to the same person or thing.
The forms which occur in the New Testament are
e/iavTou

myself

a-eavTov

thyself

iavTou {airov)

himself

iavrrjv (^avTrjv)

herself

eavTo (avTo)

itself

iavTovs

ourselves, yourselves, themselves

already seen, airos, -ij, -o, means "he, she, it" when it
stands alone, and " self" when it is joined to a noun or pronoun.
When avTos is joined to, and immediately follows, an article it
means "the same." The article and aurds are always in the same

As we have

number, gender and

case.

Distinguish carefully between

The same man.

6 avTOS av6ptin:os.

The man

and

himself.

6 avOptairos avTos.

Distinguish also between this last use of airos and the use of the
Reflexive pronoun

The man himself says

this.

6 ("ivdpaTros airos \iyei, tovto.

The man

casts himself into the sea.

d avBpaTros /SaXXei avrbv els Tr)V BaKcurcrav.

TO.

avrd contracted to Toira means " the same things.''

Questions
Questions are expressed in Greek not by altering the order of the
words in the sentence, but by placing the question mark ; at the end
It will be noticed that this question mark is like an
of the sentence.

QUESTIONS IN GREEK

iQ

The Greek

English semi-colon.
line

colon

a single dot above the

is

Examples

They

are doing this.

VOlOVai TOVTO.

Are they doing this?

TTOIOVITL

rOlTO

,*

Exercise 17
Learn Vocabulary
Kpvy\ro}ifv

1.

fiov.

3.

oi avTol

cru

Tois avTOLS p.aSi]TaLS.

9.

yap

rrpd^ets

aKavdoKltreTe Toiis dyiovs;

12.

TTopevao^ai irpos

15.

eKKoyj/eTe

Tci

11.

ayiatrowi ra (ra^^ard

do^av

aira,

ayjreTai

rrjv avrrjv oiKiav

14.

a\ij6elas-

rrjs

ovx^

8.

Kadapi^eTt

4.

rtjs (ro^tas.

^Irjtrovs

6.

e^erf

avTos ^yytfc

rd^ovo'i tovs avroiis avSpanrovs ev tols dypois.

10.

dydirij

2.

aTroicaXvylrfis ai/rois ttjv

5.
7.

TTJ

tji oIkli};

HyyekoL eTotfiairovtnv eavToiis TTopeveaBai.

avrovS) viroKpiTai.
^co^v ev eavTois.

13.

TO iraiblov ev

Ta 5iv8pa d

iarTi

dTrd^ovo't.

iv eKcivrj

13.

tov Ip-aTiov tov

7rpo<j>rjTov,

dycd^fTe Tag KOpSlas

roi/s

Xerrpoi/s

16.

Tjj yfj.

diro

tov

vp.Sav

Upoii.

6av}id<rei ttjv &6^av

TOV Kvpiov.
1. Ye shall set the books in order in the synagogue.
2. They will
hope to behold the signs of the apostles. 3. We will draw near to hear
the voice of the teacher. 4. The wicked man will do wicked things.
5. Will he cleanse himself in the same lake ?
6. She will make herself

ready to
will

go.

7.

I will

cut

buy the same books

the souls of his people.

11.

The maiden

trees that are in the field.

8. We
our children. 9. The Lord will guard
We will begin to sanctify our hearts.

down the
for
10.

will carry the loaves for the

will hide themselves in the trees.

the power of the elders.

15.

of

14.

We

13.

You

workmen.

will begin to

12. They
wonder at

shall not reveal ourselves to them.

Art thou willing to behold peace and righteousness in the kingdom

God

16.

brethren

Shall

we command them

to read the Scriptures to the

THE FIRST AORIST ACTIVE

47

LESSON XVIII
THE
The

FIRS.T

AORIST ACTIVE

it from the Second

which has different endings, but practically always
the same meaning. Very few verbs have both Aorists.
The two Aorists may be compared in this respect with the strong
and weak forms of the Past tense in English. Very few verbs in
English have both a strong and a weak Past tense if they have, the
meaning of the two forms is identical.

First Aorist is so called to distinguish

Aorist, a tense

Example:

Strong Past

Present
Beseech

Besought

At present we are concerned only with the

Weak

Past
Beseeched

1st Aorist;

but whatever

meaning of this tense applies equally to the 2nd Aorist.

The name Aorist means unbounded or unlimited. The Aorist tense is
used in Greek to denote that the action spoken of is to be regarded
simply as an event, without any regard being taken of the length of
time during which it has been going on. The Present and Imperfect
tenses on the other hand emphasise the fact that the action spoken
is

of

said about the

is

continuous or often repeated.

In practice

for the present to translate the Aorist Indicative

it will

be sufficient

by the English Past

Simple, and the Imperfect generally by the English Past Continuous,

or Imperfect.

Example

was

loosing, or I used to loose.

eXvov

fKvcra

I loosed.

This distinction should be carefully observed.

The

1st Aorist of the verb

1st

Aor

\va

is

as follows

48

THE FIRST AORIST ACTIVE

As

and the
o- is inserted between the stem of the verb
characteristic vowel of the tense is a.
which is inserted before the endings of the 1st Aorist produces

in the Future

endings.

The a

The

consonantal changes similar to those produced by the

the endings of the Future.

Examples

Present

a-

inserted before

IMPEKATIVES.

AOEIST INFINITIVE

49

Give us (keep on giving us) day by day our daily bread.

Tov apTov

^fjLWV

Tov iiriovtTwv 8l8ov

rffiiv

to KaB*

rjfiepav.

Lk.

3.

xi.

Give to us this day our daily bread.

TOV SpTov

fifiav

TOV iiriovcriov bos

rifiiv

arj/iepov.

Mt.

vi.

11.

The Present Imperative denotes a continuous act of giving day

after day.
The Aorist Imperative denotes a single act of giving for

to-day.

Another good example is found in Jn ii. 16

Take these things hence (single action), do not continue to make
Father's house a house of merchandise.
apare^

TavTa evTevOev,

pfj

tov iraTpos

iroLdre tov oikov

p.ov

my

oiKov

(piropiov.

The Aorist

Infinitive

The Aorist Infinitive differs in meaning from the Present Infinitive

same way as the Aorist Imperative differs in meaning from

just in the

the Present Imperative.

Its use denotes that the action denoted by the verb is to be regarded
simply as an action happening at some time not defined, without any
regard to its continuance or frequency.
The use of the Present Infinitive denotes that the action denoted
by the verb is to be regarded as continuous or repeated.
The Aorist Infinitive is consequently used more frequently than
the Present Infinitive in Greek and the student should always use it
unless there is some good reason to the contrary.
It is Not confined to expressing action in past time like the Latin
Perfect Infinitive, it has therefore no augment since it is not regarded
:

as a past tense.

Examples

To

keefp

ypd<jiLV

on writing the same things

Ta

avTCL

koXov eariv vpXv.

good for you.

hope to write to you soon.

eXiri'fo) ypdyjrai vfiiv

is

(PreS. Inf.)

apa.T is

Ta)(4a>s.

an Aorist Imperative.

(Aor. Inf.)
Its

form

will be explained in the next

lesson but one.

N.

50

EXERCISES
Exercise 18
Revise Vocabularies 9-13.
eSia^av

1.

laaria,

roiis

trattrov

4.

diro TOV wovrjpov.

eneitrapev

aiiToi/s

iroTapa.

9.

10.

oi

Ta^^drcacrai'

ra

Kpvyjrai

vwrovs.

12.

(jxovfi

tt/

errjprjaapev

17.

KaXov iariv ^pds irpdaaeiv

5.

CKaBapifrafitv
ttju

8ev8pa.

tov Xaov

craiff

(To^'iav

eavrovs ev Ta

Tav

paBrfraVi

8ia tovto

11.

(rov

/ifTa Tavra

7.

ov

fici

rj

rjpepa tou Kvpiov.

fpi)p<f

'

rm

14.

fxtXcvafv

'lopddvj] iroTapa.

15.

!]

eTotpMO-arf tj)v oSov tdS Kvpia.'

dno

to)v

rr/v hiKaioirvvrjv.

18.

dyuov

drrotTToXav.

iiiovTo'^ avrov

prj

ptTa tovto oZv dvea^ev tovs 6(l>BaXpovs tov

21. ^ elprjvrj
eXnl^ets Setopelv tt}v bo^av twv dyyiXav,

Trpd^ai eavTca kokov.

20.

to,

Tas evToXds as rjKOvopev

16.

KaToiKijcraTW

8,

Kadapi(rai iavTOV ev

TOV 'ladvov expose iv

Tv<pXov.

X^arwi/.

/Sdorawoi' to wXoiov diro T^s daXairoi;c.

dyidcraTe eavrovs, iyyi^ei yap

7rpo(t>riTris

8e Xejrpot

oi

2.

|3i|3\ia f v ti5 icp^.

Tratdia.

8ia Trjs yrjs KKoyj/ai

f7ropVTO

TOV Xf7rp6v 6

ra

npo^ara.

to.

ineiii^as roiis reXavas ayopdiTat xa

3.

ano Twv

to upyvptov
6.

airrfyov

'lij<roC.

o bihaaKoKos airros iBavpaat

a-KavSdXi^fiv Toiis
13.

Xr/aras

ra \6yto tov

iiriarfvaav ^

19.

Tas xapSias vp&v.

22.

TavTa yap

jjffeXrjaav

/SXc^at

oi

dyyeXoi.
1.
They baptised the publicans in the river. 2. You were going
through the land to behold the houses and the people. 3. Hide the
stones in the field. 4. Do not continue to offend the brethren (use the
H. Let them set the men in order.
Pres. Imper.).
6. You revealed
the commandments and promises to the church. 7. Shall we begin to
read the books ? 8. Cleanse your hearts, ye sinners, and confess your
sins to the church.
9. Is it lawful to heal on the Sabbath ?
10. Save
Lord, from the wickedness of this world.
thy people,
11. Make
ready therefore to hide yourselves and your children in Jerusalem.
12. Let love and righteousness dwell in yom- hearts.
13. He commanded me to write these words in a book. 14. It is good for them
15. After this I will reveal my
to keep on reading the same things.
power to the children of Israel. 16. He wished to call the publicans
to the marriage.

is

'

TTiffTeiioi

This verb

often followed by a Dative.

not contracted.

is

THE SECOND AORIST ACTIVE

51

LESSON XIX
THE SECOND AORIST ACTIVE. OBJECT CLAUSES AFTER
VERBS OF SAYING, OR THINKING
The Endings

of the Second Aorist Indicative Active are the

as those of the Imperfect Indicative Active.

The Endings

Same
of the

2nd Aorist Imperative Active are the Same as those of the Present
Imperative Active. The Endings of the 2nd Aorist Infinitive Active

Same as those of the Present Infinitive Active.

The 2nd Aorist can only be distinguished from the Imperfect and
the. Present Imperative and Infinitive by the Stem.
The Imperfect and the Present Imperative and Infinitive are formed
from the present stem. The 2nd Aorist Indicative, Imperative and
are the

formed from the verbal stem (see p. 43).

no difference in meaning between a 1st and a 2nd Aorist'
few verbs have both.
Take for example the verb ^dWa " I throw."
Infinitive are

There

is

Verbal Stem ^a\.

Present Stem |3aXX.

THE SECOND AORIST ACTIVE

52
Present

OBJECT CLAUSES
jraB

cjraBov

I suffered

e\6

ffkSov

rjveyKov

I carried

ivtyK

The Imperative
(rx^s,

that of ij\6ov

of fISov
is

is 184,

53
ird(rx<'>

came

that of

ipxafiai
(jiipa

(Ittov is flwe,

that of e^xov

is

A^e.

The Imperative of the other verbs

is

formed in the usual way.

Object clauses after verbs of saying or thinking

Object clauses after verbs meaning "to say" or "to think" are
sometimes expressed in Greek, as they nearly always are in English,
by a clause introduced by on, "that^", with a verb in the Indicative
mood.

Examples

They say that they hear the

X4yov(TCV OTi aKOVOvai Tfjv

We

believe that

7rt(Trevop.v

In Greek however the

original speaker or thinker

voice.

(jiiovrip.

we beheld the

temple.

OTi /3Xei/^a/iev to iepov.

Tense of the verb which was used by the

when he uttered the words or framed the

always retained, and the verb in the object clause is not put
it is in English when the verb in the principal
clause is in a past tense.
In English we say " The man said that he
heard the voice."
The words that the man actually uttered were
" T hear the voice." In Greek this present tense is retained and we write

thought

is

into a past tense as

o nvOpaiTOs enrfu ore aKOVfi rrjv

Again, in the sentence " The

men

(jxavrjv.

believed that the slave was there,"

men framed in their minds was "the slave is

we translate this sentence into Greek as follows

the thought that the

there," consequently

ol avSpatiroL

eTrioTcvaav

So in the following sentences

He

said that he

CiTrev

on

et8e

Ta

on

6 fiouXdy eariv

had seen the

boats.

N.B.

oTt also

(I

saw the

boats.)

ir'Ko'La,

They thought that they had seen a

iuofita'av on ecdov otrTa(riav,
'

exei.

means "because,"

vision.

(We saw

a vision.)

as has been already mentionecl.

54

EXERCISES

OBJECT CLAUSES.

In English the tense of the verb in the object clause is put one stage
further into the past the Past is used instead of the Present, and the
Pluperfect instead of the Past. But in Greek the tense used by the
:

original speaker or thinker is always retained.

The student should always ask himself what were the original words
uttered, or the original thought framed, before trying to translate such

sentences as these.

Exercise 19
Learn Vocabulary

rfi

apa.

5.

fiSofiev

12.

7.

yfjs.

(ra^eiv

bevbpa

epx^erm 6

TOV aprov.

eiretre els

yivao'Kopxv

a/iapTioXovs.

Toiis

2.

4.

on

to lepov ev

Kvpif, Tjp,apTov

cKeivr]
els

(re.

iSe Tois

6.

tov Beov riKBev

vios

eXirev

8.

els

on

nlvoviri,

dno

rr/s daXdtra-rjs,

Tov

tov olvov Koi

10. ra

e^evyov utto Tav veaviav.

13. ev Tovra yivunTKopev rrjv

ot Xi^orat

11.

efpvyov els ttjv eprjpov.

oi 8e 7rpo(j>TJTat

Si

dpyvpiov ix t^s olxias.

rjveyKopev tovs \iBovs

9.

tov dypov,

els

e^rjfiev

KpiTrjs.

oTi 6 TeXavrjs (ftipei to

Seo'TToras Tijs

etrOtovo-i

on

e/iaOfS

3.

Koa-ftov

14.

Tavra atridavtv 6 wTOixos.

jiera

1.

aydnrjv tov deov oti ewefiyjrev tov vlov avTov tov dyanrjTov

els

tov KOtrpov.

\d^e tov xapnov dnu tS>v epyuTcov. 15.

tov ayyeXov avrov trco^eiv pe,
16. eXSerto to.

14. 0!jBi els Toiis dypoiis Koi

cyvmi'

OTL 6 Kvpios eirefiyjfe

iraibia

TTpos

17.

pe.

etfropxv

riydyopev tov o)(Xov

pov.
1.

eyvapev

20.

We

oti

del

naSelv avToiis

els Trjv (Tvvayayfp),

oti TroXXa

epaBov

19.

oi paBrfToi dfro tS>v

cast ourselves into the river.

which the elders sent

for the poor.

TroXXa.

3.

2.

18.

eidov

on

ecrxev to /3(^Xia tov dSeXtjmv

You

They

dnoOToXav.

received the garments

fled

from the face of the

After this the disciples knew that they had sinned (their
thought was "we sinned "). 5. This is the stone that fell from heaven.
6. The virgin brought forth a son, and they called him Jesus i.
7. Ye
follow me, not because ye saw signs, but because ye ate the loaves.

judges.

4.

8. The Son of man must suffer many things.

9. After these days we
went to Samaria. 10. Behold the Lamb of God. 11. He said that he
had learnt many things from the prophet. 12. We know that we must

suffer

many

fields

and

things.

fled.

On this account they left

He commanded the multitude
which the young men brought.
13.

14.

and drink the wine

Accusative case.

the sheep in the

to eat the bread
15.

The prophet

LIQUID VERBS, FUTURE AND AORIST

55

who had the book died in the wilderness. 16. We saw that the slaves
were carrying the boat to the lake (the thought was "they are carrying").
17. They said that the children had eaten the fruit (the words used
were " the children ate the fruit "). 18. They knew that the maidens
were in the house. 19. I heard that the apostles were going to
Jerusalem.

LESSON XX
THE FUTURE AND AORIST ACTIVE OP LIQUID VERBS.
TEMPORAL GLAUSES
\

The Future and Aorist of verbs whose stems end in a

V, p present some peculiarities.
The present stem is longer than the verbal stem
(1)

liquid letter

fi,

(a) it

has a

long vowel or a diphthong where the verbal stem has a short vowel, or
(6) it ends in XX where the verbal stem ends in X (except in the case of
o0fi'X(a).

(2)

The Future Active and Middle

their endings

have endings

instead of inserting

<r

before

like those of the Present of contracted

verbs in ea.

The 1st Aor. Act. generally has a long vowel or diphthong in

(3)
the stem, and does not insert a- before its endings, but adds them
direct to the lengthened stem.
The following verbs of this class are important.
1st or

Present

2nd

TEMPORAL CLAUSES,

56
trwflpa

(Tirep

irirtpSy

(palva

(jiav

^avovpai

<j)6eipa>

ipBep

SOW

((rnfipa

I manliest

^6fpS>

The compound forms

nrapd

I destroy

fKJideipa

of these verbs such as TrapayyeWa,

iiralpet,

form their tenses in exactly the same way as the

uncompounded forms given above. The Future of dyyeWa is conjugated
eK^aKKo), KaraKpivo)

as follows

dyyeXa, dyyikeis, ayye\el, dyyfXovpfv, ayyeXelre, dyye\ovin.

The 1st Aor. Imperat. is ayytiXov and the Infinitive is

The other verbs are all conjugated in the same way.

dyyciXai.

Temporal Clauses, or clauses denoting time

A Temporal

Clause denotes the time of the action of the verb in

the clause on which it depends.
Temporal clauses are introduced by ore or 6s meaning "when,"
e<ur

meaning "while" or "until."

When

a temporal clause refers to a single definite event

its

verb

is

in the Indicative mood, just as in English.

N.B. Distinguish carefully between Sre " when," and

" because."

Examples

on " that,"

or

When

he came to the sea he saw the ships.

npos Trjv dd\a(r<Tav flBe ra ir\oia.
While he read the books he remained in the house.

ore rj\0f

eas dveyvco ra

He

/3(/3Aia KaT(p,fiveii

iv TJj oiKi'a.

remained in the house until the slave came.

Karcpfiufv iv

rfj

olxia eai ^\6fV 6 SouXof.

The Preposition
The

irapd

meaning of this preposition is Beside.

used with a noun or pronoun in the accusative,

root

It is

genitive, or

dative case.

When

used with the Accusative case

motion along side of places.

it

denotes generally motion

to beside or

Examples
wapa rfju odov.
by the roadside.
napa rrfv 0d\a<TO-av

6 8e tTTTopos enea'fv

But the seed

o Sc

Irjtrovs

fell

rjXBev

But Jesus went along the

Trjs

rdKiKaiat.

side of the sea of Galilee.

EXERCISES

n-apd.

When

used with the Genitive case

it

57

denotes motion from beside

of persons.

Example

on irapa aov ^rj\0ov.

And they knew that I came forth from Thee.
kol eyvaxrav

When used with the Dative it denotes rest beside and may be
translated "near," or "by," or "with," or "at the house of."
Example

aira

e/ictvav Trap'

Trjv

cKelvrjv.

fjiiipav

They remained with him that

day.

Exercise 20
Learn Vocabulary
ore

1.

ol

fie

15.

aTpariarat rjK6ov

aiiTOvs 6^ KopvTjXios.

els rrjv otKLav aTTTjyyeiKav otl

airiareiKcv

rareKva
avT&v fiaxatpa.
3. ov fxeveXre ev ra tott,^ tovtco aXX* aTroOavelaOe iv
TTj yji T&v -j(6paiV vp.S)v,
4. ot airotTToKot, eff-ireipav tov \6yov iv Tois
KoraKptifova-LTas \rjpaf koI dTroKTevovat

2.

KapSiais TOiv fiadrjraiv.

Irjaov.
7.

6.

eV

Kaip^

roS

ol

jSjiSXiov.

KaTf(f}vyv 6^

ore

9.

*Io)(ri7<^

Bakaaaav.

^Xeyj/ova-L

t^v Bo^av pov.

epyarai tov Bpovov.

Trap avTjj.

14.

irapdkvTiK^

13.

Mapia.

(rvv

12.

epelvaptv iv rc icpto

fie

TJKOvtrav

apov

ttjv kKivtjv

irteiv

to

ewff

(OKo86povv

ol

ravTa irapa t^s xVP^^ epeivav

S^etXes dpyvptov toIs TfKwvaiS'

''Eyet/ae,

dvvacrBe

10.

(jjavovpai to

&s

eais

KpotrtoTTOv pov avTois Kal

11.

epetva eKft

8.

aTrtKreivev 6 'HpmSijs to iraiSia iv BrjffKefp

AtyvnTov

els

pe nielv

TroTYfpiov

fiei

fie

tov

OTricra)

KpiTai eKpetvav Tas <j}v\as 'IcparjX,

e<f)delpapev Tas Kotpas al rjaav -rrapa Trjv

aviyvm to

T(a

^pv ovv tov uravpov Koi ^XBev

6.

eKelvco

15.

aov Ka\ vnaye

fie

els

*lT)rrovs eiTTfv

t6v oIkov

itov^

&s fie rfKOvaev TavTa ^pev Tr/v kXivtjv Kal vnrjyev, 16. aTreoTeiXa/xev tovs
dyyiXovs eTotpdaat ttjv ofioy.
17. 6 irpoffyTjTrjs enrev OTt TrdvTa hvvaTa
Trapa r<a

icTTi

19.

fiBi\rj(Tas

TTOts

dSvvaTov

Bea.
Tjpav.
1.

21.
22.

Bfm'^.

18.

TrnpijyyeiXa-re aiiTols

ayeiv Ta Trpo^ara Trapa

itTTiv

aXX* ov Trapa roJ

dea>,

20.

<j)6eipai

to.

TrXom.

jrapa Tols dvBpa-

TrdvTa yap SvvaTU Tvapd ra

Kai tovto rjKOvaaiiev nap' avTov otl

ol

prj

Tci fieVSpa.

fiet

(f)t\e'lv

Toits aSeX<^oiis

^apuraloL eXeyov oTi iaBUt Trapa dpapTtoXa.

2.
Joseph took the
Send the young men to rouse the soldiers.
Mary and departed into Egypt. 3. They shall not die in

Child and

' Proper nouus in Greek are often preceded by the article

this article
must not be translated into English.
- Trapi
T<f fleij) etc. "near God"; translate "with God," or "to God."
;

58

THIRD DECLENSION, CONSONANT ENDINGS

the wilderness, for the soldiers will save them. 4. I will manifest
my servants (use doiXoc) at that time, saith the Lord.
5. The Pharisees went to eat bread at the house of the prophet^.
6. This is impossible with men, but it is possible with God.
7. When

myself to

Herod heard these words he sent his servants to destroy the children
Bethlehem with the sword. 8. They remained in the house while
the paralytic took up his bed. 9. We announced that the apostle was
staying (use fieva>) in the house of Cornelius.
10. Take up thy cross
and carry it after me. 11. You ought not to condemn these widows.
in

I shall cast the

12.

sword into the

lake.

13.

When

the disciples came

to the village they sowed the word in

The Son

14.

many

of

man

the hearts of the people.

(insert the article before " of man ") must suffer

I heard this from (napd) the prophet who lives

the house of the widow in Bethlehem. 16. Wilt thou not
slay the wicked,
Lord? 17. They wished to throw the stones beside
the temple. 18. The Pharisees said that the disciples of John did not

things.

15.

(/levm) at

eat with publicans and sinners (use napd).

LESSON XXI
THE THIRD DECLENSION
The
first

third declension contains

or second declension.

all

nouns which do not belong

The stems of third declension nouns end

a vowel, generally i, v or ev.

(1) in

a consonant,

to the

(2) in

TMrd. Declension nouns with stems ending in a consonant.

(1)
The endings of these nouns when masculine or feminine are as
follows

Singular

Nom.

Plural

THIRD DECLENSION, EXAMPLES

These endings are added to the stem.

away the ending of the Genitive

Examples

Nominative
VV^

night

irais
boy
apxav ruler

The

The stem

is

59
found by taking

Singular.
Genitive

VVKTOS

Stem

TrmSos

VVKT
waiS

apxovros

dp^ovT

following are examples of the declension of nouns of the third

declension.

THIRD DECLENSION, CONSONANT ENDINGS

60

Plural

Nom.

THIRD DECLENSION, VOWEL ENDINGS

62

being sent for the children by the widows. 10. The shepherds called
own sheep, and they came after them. 11. Unless we eatjthe
12. Here
flesh of the Son of man we shall have no life in ourselves.
their

will I dwell for ever, saith the Lord.

LESSON XXII
NOUNS WITH STEMS ENDING IN A VOWEL, ETC.
NEUTER NOUNS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION.
(2)

Nouns of the Third Declension with stems ending

vowel.
These nouns have stems ending

Examples
(-5)

in

t,

v,

or

ev.

in a

THIRD DECLENSION, NEUTER AND IRREGULAR

63

Notice that as in the case of neuter nouns of the 2nd declension the
Nominative, Vocative, and Accusative cases have the same endings,
and the Nominative, Vocative, and Accusative Plural end in a.
Decline like ypdiifia the words given in the vocabulary, and also
Trip, TTvpos, fire

are

all

ripas, Tcparos, a

wonder

<j)S)s,

cjxotos, light

Neutee Nodns with Stems Ending

The

which

neuter.

final s

in

of the stem appears only in the Nominative singular,

and there the es is changed to os.

In the other cases r is dropped and the two vowels thus brought
together are contracted.

Example Stem yfi/es with Genitive ending added becomes yivea-os,

when the s is omitted it becomes yeveos, and this is contracted to
The same takes place in the other cases.
yexous.
:

Singular

Nom. Voc.

Ace.

yevos

Plural

a race

yevr/

Gen.

yevovs

yeviav or yfvau

Dat.

ytVa

yeveai

The nouns

of this class

which occur most frequently

are given in the vocabularies.

They must be

from nouns of 2nd declension ending in

os

in the

N. T.

carefully distinguished

which are nearly

all

masculine.

Irregular

The declension

nouns of the Third Declension

of the following

nouns should be noted

they are

contracted in the Dat. and Gen. Sing, and have the Voc. Sing, the

same as the stem.

TraTTjp 6

THIRD DECLENSION, IRREGULAE

64
The

The

following

is

the declension of

a man.
Plural

Nom.

dvrjp

avSpfS

Voc.
Acc.

avep

avSpes

avSpas

Gen.

avSpa
dvSpos

dvtpav

Dat.

dvSpi

dvSpaa-i

following nouns

Nominative

dvrip,

Singular

should also be specially noticed

ADJECTIVES OF THE THIRD DECLENSION

1. This man did signs and wonders in the city.
hands and my feet. 3. Ye are the light of the world.
was wiping {i^ijuxa-tre) the feet of Jesus with her hair.

did eat the

manna

ear of the deaf

man
9.

5.

Behold

my

The woman
Our fathers

fiawa) in the wilderness. 6. He touched the

with his hand. 7. The king sent this woman to

{to

bring her father from the

his daughter.

2.
4.

65

city.

The Holy

8.

He was

Spirit shall

seeking his mother and

remain with them for ever.

11. The dogs

In that year my
13. The scribes would not receive
father went through your city.
baptism for' the remission of their sins. 14. I read the letters which
15. Your cities are destroyed with
he wrote by the hand of his wife.
woman,
17.
16. We bowed (eKa/ii/^nfiew) our knees to the king.
fire.
depart in peace, for I will heal thy daughtei'.
10.

Thou

sayest that thou knowest the will of God.

ate the fish which I took out of the water.

12.

LESSON XXIII
ADJECTIVES OF THE THIRD DECLENSION,
IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES
Adjectives of the third declension have only two terminations,

because the feminine

The two

is

the same as the masculine.

principal forms of these adjectives are declined as follows

akrjBrjs^

Stem

true
aKrjdfs

66

IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES

IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES
Great care must be taken to distinguish
"to,"

and

"one"

(neuter)

els

"one"

from tV "in."
Masc.

Fern.

Neut.

67
(maso.)

from

FIRST AOEIST PASSIVE

68
avTovs.

12.

crKavSaKileTio tva tSiv

fiijSfir

yovfts avTov ovk eyvatrav

on

fK rov a-irepfuiTos AavfiS,

cpX^Tui 6

dpxiepeav

Xpurrm;

on

ovk

oix V

14.

ypa<t>'l

oi hi

(nrev

on

Snov tjv AaveiS,

&pq (rvvdyovToi aira ttoXXoI t&v

diro Bij^Xec/u t^j Kajiijs

cv eKfivt/

15.

ot Xiyavtriv

(cai

13.

iralStov toutiov.

jiivei iv rfj TrdXet.

rrj

earm

dvaaTatris.

Lord, and my tongue shall praise

mouth,
thy name. 2. Didst not thou sow good seed in thy field ? 3. Do not
carry any (use fiijSfi's) sick man to the synagogue on the Sabbath day.
I came into, this world
5.
4. If thou wilt, thou art able to heal me.
for (els) judgement.
6. One of the lepers, when he saw that he was
1.

Thou

shalt open

my

healed, cast himself at his feet.

saying was true.

Holy

Spirit,

8.

7.

The high

priests

knew

that this

All the disciples were full of faith and of the

and they healed the

sick,

and cast out many

devils.

a resurrection. 10. My
parents built many houses in this city. 11. Let no one love darkness
more than light. 12. When they came to the villages they preached
the Gospel to all the Gentiles who dwelt there. 13. If I judge, my
judgement is true. 14. When the disciples of John heard that he was
dead, they came and took up his body.
9.

None

of the priests believes that there

is

LESSON XXIV
THE FIRST AND SECOND AORIST
THE FUTURE PASSIVE
The conjugation

of the First Aorist Passive

Indicative

is

PASSIVE.

as follows

FUTURE AND SECOND AORIST PASSIVE

69

Tlie conjugation of the Future Passive is as follows it is formed by

adding 6ri<r to the stem of the verb and putting after it the endings of
the Present Passive.
:

Indicative
I

Xtiflifo-ofiat

Infinitive

shall be loosed etc.

"KvBria-ea-dai

to be about

to be loosed.
\v8ri<reTai

\v6rjiT6fieBa
\v6fi(Tf<r6f

\v$T)(TOVTai

The presence

of the letter 6 at the beginning of the endings of these

tenses causes certain consonantal changes which

as follows

may

be summarised

K.,

y,

IT,

^,

T,

8,

X followed by 6 become
(^ followed by 6 become
6 followed by d become

In the contracted verbs the short vowel

is

^fl,
(f>d,

ad.

lengthened before

6.

Examples
Present

1st Aor. Pass.

eirpd)(6rjv

inel(r6r]v

The Second Aorist Passive does not occur very frequently in the
N.T. Its endings are practically the same as those of the First Aorist
Passive with the exception that the 6 is omitted. The 2nd Aor. Pass,
of <t)aiv<o is given below.

AORIST AND FUTURE PASSIVES

70
The

following are

some of the Second Aorists Passive found'

in

the N.T.
iypa<liT]v

iK.pv^T)v
ea-irdprjv

ea-TaXtjv

earpdtfnjv
f(l)6dpriv

"I
"I
"I
"I
"I
"I

was
was
was
was
was
was

from ypa^a
from Kpiwra
from a-ireipa
sown"
from trreXKo)
sent"
from a-Tpitjxo
turned"
destroyed" from ^6fipa>
written"

hidden"

The following important verbs have irregular forms of the

and Future Passive.
Present

1st Aoriat

EXERCISES
fia^ev 6 ox^oSj eXcyov 8e
^fiepais Toyv irareptav
8.

eKeXeuo-f rov

iroWoi OTI^ Tavra to, repara oiiK irpd)(67] iv Tois

7. fi^ra Tavra at(j>dr] jrao'i Tois airofTToKois,

fjfiSiv.

avdpa

eVe;^^^i'at 8ta t^s noKetas,

ra Kvpta^

iras 6 Xaoff K\r]6rj<rerat dytos

turo tSiv

dvSp&v avrav.
12.

/SaortXeW.

iff\ridr]<rav els

Kokov CTTreppu

(j>dvrj

18.

Se ev 86^7],

19.

Kalrd

at

9.

ev eKeivij

rrj rjfiepa

yvvaiKes TrapeKXrjBrjo'av

dKOvtrBrjaerai.

13.

^t^dvLa^.

17.

16.

tov

irdvTfs ol l)(6ies

ravTacpprjOj] 8ia a-TofiaTos Aaveid.

iepeav ireWetv rov ^aaiXea.

TOV yevovs.

1.

dyyeXav

14.

10.

iroifjira to. prj/uiTd jxm) aROVcrBrjvai vtto

11.

ovbeis tS)v

TO vS(op.

is rS>v

fpdrjTca

71

0T Kapirov

15.

irep.-

eTToirja-e

to

Zi^ao'tKev^^CKii}6r)tTeiVTr6 iravTos

rd aaifxaTa tcov dyltov (CFTrdpr} iv nTifiia^^ iyepdrja-eTai

d^poves vtto r5)v vo^SiV tov alatvos tovtov.

iKKr)6r)T

All this nation was called righteous (neut. agreeing with yei/os)^

2.

Many

3.

The

book by the high priest.

were taken by these boys. 4. We were sown in weakness
5. If the devil shall be cast
(da-ffeveia), we shall be raised in power.
out the crowd will wonder. 6. The good seed was carried to the fields.
8. We
7.
I was sent by one of the king's servants to seek for thee.
know that this Gospel shall be preached to all the Gentiles, and that
many will hear. 9. In that day many bodies of the saints arose (were
10. We wish
raised), and came into the city, and appeared to many.
11.
Thou shalt be saved by
those sheep to be driven to the hills.
12. You commanded the
faith and hope, if thou wilt abide in them.
13. All these things shall be done in
stones to be cast into the water.
the darkness.
14. Ye have heard that it was said by our fathers
" Thou shalt not make an image of the Lord thy God."
15. We were
called foolish' by many of the rulers of the Gentiles, but we know that
the words which we speak are true.
of these words were written in a

fish

* on must not be translated, it is often used to introduce the exact words

of a speaker, like our inverted commas, Syntax 158.
3
*

fi^Kio "tares."
h inidq. " in dishonour."

Syntax

See note 2 on the Greek exercise.

'

" foolish," plural, Syntax 11.

11.

PARTICIPLES

72

LESSON XXV
PARTICIPLES
Participles are verbal adjectives sharing the characteristics both of

verbs and adjectives.

As a verb a participle has a subject, and, if it is the participle of a
It has also
transitive verb in the active voice, it may have an object.
tense and voice.

As an
with

adjective

its subject, in

it

agrees with the

number, gender and

noun which

it qualifies,

that

is

case.

The active participles are declined with 3rd declension endings in

the masculine and neuter, and Ist declension endings in the feminine.
They

are as follows

FIRST AORIST PARTICIPLE

73

First Aorist Participle Active

Singular

N.V. \va-as
A. Xvaavra

Plural

\viTa<Ta

\virav

XvtravTes

\va-airai

Xvtrcurau

\vaav

XvfravTas

Xv<rd(Tas

XvaavTa

XvtravTa

G.

XvfravTOs

Xvtrdcrrjs

XviravTOs

Xva-dvrtop

Xvaaaav

XvardvTav

D.

XvtravTt

XvtrdtTrj

XvtrauTi

Xv(Tao'L

Xv(rd(raLS

Xutracrt

The present

participles active of the contracted verbs in ew are

declined as follows
:

N.V.
A.
G.

The present

cjitXav

cl>i,Xov<ra

(^(Xoi>

<j)tXovvTa

(jjiXovcrav

(jitXovv

<^iXov(Tris

rjitXoiivTos

(jjiXovvTOS

participle of

elfil is

N.V. &v
A. SvTU
G.

The present

ovtra

ovfxav

ov

OVTOS

ovros

participle middle

2nd declension.

adjective of the

etc.

declined like Xiav

and passive

The

etc.

is

declined like an

aorist participles passive are

declined with 3rd declension endings in the masculine and neuter and
1st declension

endings in the feminine.

Pres. Part. Mid.

and

Pass.

1st Aor. Part. Pass.

Xvo/jifvos,

ri,

being loosed

ov

loosed, or

Xvdels, de'ura, 6iv

having been

loosed

2nd Aor. Part. Pass.

The

having appeared

<jiaveiSi eiffa, iv

1st Aor. Part. Pass,

is

declined as foUovys

Singular

N.V.

Plural

Xvdcis

Xvdeicra

Xv64v

XvBivTis

Xvdelcrai

Xudivra

XvBivra

Xv6ei(rav

Xvdiv

Xvdevras

Xv6eio-as

XvBivra

G.

Xv64vTO^

XvSeioTjs

XvBevTos

Xvdevrav

XvOeiaStv

XvBivTtov

D.

XvOevTi

XvBela-Tj

XvBevTi

XvBs'iai

XvBeitrais

XvBeifri

A.

Participles are generally negatived with

Participles are used

They may be used

/xij

in the

New

Testament.

much more frequently in Greek than

either Adjectivally or Adverbially.

in English.

ADJECTIVAL AND ADVERBIAL PARTICIPLES

74
1.

The Adjectival

Participle.

In this use the adjectival side of the participle is most prominent.

The adjectival participle is generally preceded by an article with which
The participle preceded by an article is very common in
it agrees.
the New Testament. It should generally be translated by a clause
introduced by a relative pronoun, but may sometimes be translated

by a noun.
Examples

iruTTevovTes

oi

d (TireLpav

those who believe, or believers,

the sower.

They that hunger and

01 ireLvatvTes^

thirst after righteousness.

he that was sown by the way

This

is

o^os

e(TTLV 6 Trapa Trjv

The Adverbial

V. 6.

side.

Mt.

odov arnapeis.

Notice that any number of qualifying words

between the article and the participle.
2.

Mt.

Kal 8f,ylfS)VTS^ ttjv 8iKcuoavifr]v.

xiii. 19.

may be

inserted

Participle.

In this use the verbal side of the participle is most prominent.

"When a participle is used adverbially it is equivalent to an
Adverbial Clause modifying some other verb in the sentence.
Such participles are best translated into English by a suitable
adverbial clause. The context must decide what kind of adverbial
In the New Testaclause the participle in question is equivalent to.
ment an adverbial participle is generally equivalent to a Temporal ^
clause, sometimes to a Causal ^ clause, rarely to a Concessive^ clause.

Examples (a)_ A participle denoting the time of the action

main verb, translated by a Temporal clause in English.
:

of the

And when he came out, he saw

Km i^f\6o>v eibiv ttoXvv o^\ov.

a great multitude.
Mt. xiv. 14.
And when the chief priests and Pharisees had heard his parables,
they knew that he spoke about them.
Koi aKovtravres oi dp^^tepels Kal

eyvaxrav

on

ol

^apt(raiot

ras napa^oXas avTOV

nepX airwv \eyei.

Mt.

xxi. 45.

Generally speaking, the Present Participle denotes action taking

place at the same time as the action of the main verb, and the Aorist
^
''

For these forms see lesson 28.

See appendix on English Grammar.

ADVERBIAL PARTICIPLES
Participle denotes action

75

which took place before the action of the

main verb.
Examples.

Present Participle

He

appeared to them as they were fighting.

&(l)dri avTols fiaxofifvois.
Acts
Aorist Participle

And

vii.

26.

having fasted forty days and forty nights he afterwards

hungered.
KaL vrfareva'as

rj[j,pas

Ttr(rapa.KovTa Koi TeiraapaKovTa vvKras vtjrepov

ineivatrev.

Mt.

Present Participle

He

that has ears to hear let

e^wv

Aorist Participle

him

hear.

SiTa CLKOveiv aKoveTot.

But he that had been healed did not know who

6 8e laBcls^ oIk jfSfi^

by a Causal clause

Examples

it

they were
he was a disciple.

all afraid of

7rdvTS e<j>o^QVVTO aiiTov,

the

life

v. 13.

main verb

in English.

him, because they did not believe that

/if]

7ri(rTvovTS OTi ecTTiv p.a9rjTr)S.

Acts
Godliness

was.

Jn

iariv.

And
KCLL

ri's

Participle denoting the cause of the action of the

(6)

translated

iv. 2.

is

ix. 26.

profitable for everything, because it has a promise for

now, as well as for that which is to come.

npos navra aKJieXi/ios iariv, f TrayyeXtaK txovfra fffl^r T^f
1 Tim. iv. 8.
fieXKmjarjs.

that

is

^ 8e eiire^fia

vvv Kol

The

rfjs

Participle often denotes the

attendant circumstances

may

of

an

be best translated into English by a finite verb

joined to that which is the main verb in Greek by "and."
action,

and

Examples

He

answered and

said....

dnoKpideis eiirev....
'

See Lesson 28.

See Lesson 36.

76

ADVERBIAL PARTICIPLES
Immediately the father of the child cried out and

said....

Mk ix.

v6vs Kpdas 6 Trarrip tov TratSlov cKeyev ....

Take Mark and bring him with thee.

MapKov avoKafimv aye jieTa (reavrov.

2 Tim.

24.

iv. 11.

In some cases however it is better to translate the Greek participle

by an English participle. The method of translation which sounds
best in English must be chosen.

Examples

In those days John the Baptist came into the wilderness of Judea
preaching and saying "Repent."
6V Se

eKslvaif wapaylyveToi ^ItadvTjs 6 BanTiaTrjs Kijpvtrirav

TCLis fifiepais

\eyav MeTavoeire.
they were baptised by him in the river Jordan, confessing their

iu Tfi eprjpa Trjs 'lovdaiaf,

And
sins.

KoX e^airTi^ovTO

vn avTOv

iv

ra

'lop^dvij norafia i^OfioXoyovfievoi ras

Mt.

dp-aprias airav.

iii.

6.

Exercise 25
Learn Vocabulary

SaKaaaav ttjs ToKCKalas eldev Sipava koi

Sipavos dpxl>i^dWovTas iv tji BaXdaoTi. 2. kcu.
Tas trvvayayas avrav koi Saipovia CK/SdXXaiv. 3. ttSs

Koi napdycov irapd Trjv

1.

'AvSpeav tov

dSfX(jfroi'

r]K6ev Krjpvfra-mv els

8uo";(oXa)s^ ol
4.

19.

to ;fp^/iara e^ovTes

els rrjv

^atriKeiav tov Beov eltTeXevfrovrat.

Koi 'qaav ol (^aydxTfr tovs aprovs 7rei/T-aKj(rxiXot avSpes.

SiairnapivTes 8ir)\6ov

fvayyeXi^opevoi tov \6yov.

els 'lepova-dXrip eTreipa^e

avTov,

KoWdvBai^

6.

Tots padrjTals, Koi

mtTTevovTes oTt ioTiv padrjTTjs.

5.

oi

pev olv

irapayevopevos 8e

wdvres etfio^ovvro

aKovatv

be 'Avavlas Toiis
\6yovs TovTOvs irefTwv e^eyjrv^ev^' koi eyevero <j)6^os piyas eTri* irdvras
TOVS aKovovTas. 8. Kaitrirapd^av^ avTOV TonvevpaTO d<ddapTOV^Kai<^(Avri-

vav

prj

(fxavij

peydXij, i^rjkBev i^ avTOv.

9.

7.

koi rjv iv

Trj iprjpa)

TeiTtrapaKOVTa

Tfpepas Kol TeircapaKovTa vvktus neipa^opevos vtto tov Saravd.

oSv

dKov<raTe

irapa^oXifv

ttjv

M(av(rrjs Koi ^HXeias

^
^

tov

inrelpavTos.

11.

icai

avvXdKovVTes peT avTov.

Swx^Xus "with

difficulty, hardly."
KoWaaBai. "to join himself," see Lesson 28.
^itj/v^ev "gave up the ghost," from iK^ixu.

"upon."

iiri

trrapd^av 1st Aor. part, from (TTapdaaw.

10.

&(j>8ri

vpels
avTois

GENITIVE ABSOLUTE

77

Partioiplea should be used to translate all the words

and

marked

*,

also all the English participles.

Those that had preached* the word were scattered abroad.

passing by the sea of Galilee the disciples taught many people.
3. Blessed are those that hear* and those that believe* the words of
4. Many of the publicans therefore were baptised confessthis book.
ing their sins. 5. But he answered* and said " How hardly shall ye
enter into the kingdom of heaven." 6. The sower* soweth the word.
7. And when he came forth* he saw a great multitude.
8. And all
those that heard* kept these words in their hearts. 9. But we were
afraid because we did not believe* that his words were true.
10. This
11. While they were teaching* the
is he that was sent* by the king.
12. And having come out of the
people they remained in the temple.
13. But the prophet cried and said*
city he went to another place.
"Behold the man that cometh* after me: him shall ye hear."
14. When the governor therefore heard* this he was afraid and all
15. And when they had cast* the net into the
that were* with him.
16. And when they had come* to Bethlehem
sea they took many fishes.
they tried to enter into the synagogue, but those that kept* it cast them
17. But while I was walking* through the fields I saw a great
out.
light from heaven and heard a voice speaking to me.
18. The prophet
remained in the mountain forty days^ and forty nights writing the words
1.

2.

And

of this law.

LESSON XXVI
THE GENITIVE ABSOLUTE. INTERROGATIVE AND
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. CERTAIN PREPOSITIONS

noun or pronoun and a

participle

may

stand by themselves in

the Genitive case if the noun or pronoun does not denote the same
person or thing as the subject or object of the sentence.
This construction is called the Genitive Absolute.
phrases of
Absolute means " loosed," from the Latin " absolutus
'

this kind are called " absolute

from the rest of the sentence.
1

Days and

"

because they are loosed in construction

nights, use Ace. case, Syntax 18.

78

INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN

The Genitive Absolute should generally be translated by an adverbial

The context must decide whether this clause is to
be Temporal, Causal, or Concessive. Most of the Genitives Absolute
clause in English.
in the

New

Testament

may

best be translated by Temporal clauses.

Examples

And when

the devil was oast out the

dumb man

spoke.

Mt. ix. 33.

slumbered and slept.

Kal eK^\r)devTOs TOv baijiovlov i\d\rj<Tv 6 Ka(f>6s.

And

while the bridegroom tarried they

^ovL^ovTOS Se

7-ou vvfiffiiov

The same construction

all

ivvara^av neural kcu indOevSov.

Mt. XXV.

5.

found in Latin, but the case there used is

the Ablative. A similar construction is also rarely found in English,
but in that language the case used is the Nominative.

Example

is

" This done, he

went home."

N.B. The rule given above as to the noun or pronoun in a Genitive

Absolute not referring to the same person or thing as the subject or
object of the sentence is generally observed in Classical Greek.
But it
is frequently broken in New Testament Greek as the following example
will

show

And

as he

was coming out of the temple, one of his

disciples said to

him...
Kdi exwopevofievov avTOv ex TOv iepov \iyei

aira

The Interrogative Pronoun

els tS>v fiaBrfrav avTov...

Mk xiii.
of either a

noun or an

ris

who ?

adjective.

It is declined as follows

Singular
Maso. Fern.

Plural

Neut.

Masc. Fein.

Neut.

N.

Ti9

A.

Tiva

Ti

Tivas

TLva

G.

TWOS

tIvos

t'ivwv

Tivav

D.

tLvi

Tivi

rlcn

t'utl

Examples of

Ti

its

Whom

use

do

rives

riva

hear? rivas aKoim;

I hear? rlvas av6panovs aKoua;

What men do

1.

what ? can take the

place

CERTAIN PREPOSITIONS
The

m generally translated by " some or

distinguished from m Interrogative by having no
and
Pronoun

Indefinite

"any."
It is

by the

79

is

"

accent',

cannot stand as the first word in a sentence.

declined in the same way as ris Interrogative.

fact that it

It is

Examples of its use

The

Some one

says this.

man

certain

toCto Xeyn tk.

says this.

avBpanos ns tovto

following prepositions present

some

difficulty

Xeyfi.

down.

Kara, root-meaning

followed by the Accusative or Genitive case. When followed

by an Accusative it means " down along, throughout, with regard to,

Kara

is

according to,"

when

followed

The meanings underlined

by a Genitive

are the

it

commonest

means "down from,

in the

Examples
Take him and judge him according to your

New

Testament.

\a^ere avrov

Vfieisy

law.

Koi Kara rhv vofiav vfjMV Kplvere avTOv,

Jn

He
6

that

firf

is

not with

me

^6r' ep-ov Kar

atv

is

ejLtov

Lk,

ecrrtV.

Notice the following special phrases

iri,

xviii. 31.

against me.

car' ovap

in a dream.

KOTO. Kaipov

in

Kad' fjiiipav

daily.

KOT

privately.

ISiav

XI.

23.

due season.

root-meaning upon.

by the Accusative, Genitive or Dative case. It is

draw any clear distinction between its meanings with these
three cases, but with the Accusative it means "upon," "on," or "to"
" upon,"
often with some idea of motion, with the Genitive it means
cVi is followed

difficult to

"on," and occasionally "in the time

it means "on," or "at."

of,"

"in the presence of," with the

Dative

Examples

on good ground.

And

other

aXKa

6c eireaev ewl Trjv yijv ttjv Koh'jv.

1

fell

It is

an "

enclitic "

see page 166.

Mt.

xiii. 8.

80

CERTAIN PREPOSITIONS
Take

my

yoke upon you.

^^-

dpare tov ^vyop

fiov i(^

vfiaS'

And

fig tree

on the road he went to

seeing one

avKTJv fiiav eiri t^s oSoO rjKdep cjt

teal Idaiv

avrriv.

Mt.
I

have

iya>

glorified thee

ac e86^a<ra

upon the

^^' ^9,
it.

xxi. 19.

earth.

Jn xvn.

iiri Tfjs y^r.

4.

In the time of Elisha the prophet.

fVi 'EXt<raiou tov

Lk.

7rpo(jyriTov.

iv. 27.

And

they wondered at him.

Koi iBaijia^ov in avT^.
Know that it is near at the doors.

on

yiva)tTKtT

eyyvs

eVl dvpats.

etrriv

Mk xii.

17.

Mk xiii.

29.

towards.
followed by the Accusative, Genitive or Dative

npos, root-meaning

wpos

is

so rarely followed

that

it will

be

by a Genitive

sufiicient to regard it

the Accusative case.

It means "towards, up
"with,"

it is

to, to,

but it is
Testament
as a preposition followed only by

or Dative case in the

case,

New

with regard to," and in certain cases

meaning "to say" where a simple

also used after verbs

Dative would have been expected.

Examples
In the fourth watch of the night he went to them walking on the
:

sea.

TfTaprr] Se ipvXaKJj Trjs vvktos

^\6eu npos

avToiis irfpinarmv in\ Tfjv

BaKaaaav.

Mt.

xiv. 25.

And

Jesus said to Simon "Fear not."

KOI flitfv npos TOV 2ipMiva 'irjirovs Mij cjio^ov.
The word was with God.
o \6ryos ^v nphs tov deov.

Lk.

v. 10.

Jn

i.

1.

See the Appendix on Prepositions.

Exercise 26

A
Learn Vocabulary

20.

\aKovvTos tov Herpov to pruiara ravra, enecrev to nvevpa to

2. rj yap vap^ niBvp,ei Kara
TOV nvevp.aTos Koi to nvfUfM Kara t^s capKos.
3. iyyi/s 8e offirijj AvSSas
1.

CTi 8e

&yiov en\ ndvTas Toits aKOVOVTas TOV \6yov,

EXERCISES
TTJ

81

aKovtTavTfs OTi HeTpos eiTTiv ev avTTJ, aTTctrTftXav 8io

loTTTTiy, 01 lioBrfTiu

avopas irpos avTov.

4. 6 fie cttI ra TriTpatdrj^ tnrapeLS, ovtos eariv 6 top

\6yov aaovaVf KaX tvdvs pcra ^apds Xap-^dvav aiirov. 5. ava^atpovvrtav fie

avrSsv,

SyyeKos Kvpiov

ifioii

TO iraibiov Kai
fie

eVt r^

oi o;^Xot

T^ Up^.

pxihov^ iv

T&v

dWa

7.

\iyav IlapaXajSe

T<f \<i>iri)^

i^eir\ri(T<rovTO

6.

XTjfiyjretrBe^ hvvap,iv,

Ka5' ripjpau

8.

vfids.

c<f>'

tow hvo

tis ck

10,

to BeKqpu tov

eTroirjtrev

Tore iTpo(Tr\k6cv aiira yvvfj tis aiT-oCtra tl nap'

11.

eKOovTOS

npotrenapTepovv ofioBv-

fie

Kai oylfovrai^ tov vlov tov dvdpaTTOv ipxofievov eTTt

9,

TOV ovpavov.

v<l>e\<av

iraTpos;

avTOv,

8i8a)(jj

Tov dyiov TTveifiaTOS

kut ovap

<j)aivfTai

airoC, KOi (peiye els AiyvnTov.

rrpi p,r]Tipa

aiiToii,

fie

etnev avTij Ti deXeif ;

B
eV

1.

dp^^iepdajs^Avva Ka\ Kaa(^a eyeveTO

/.a^apiov ev t^

KOTa TOV

5.

(TTepdv^ ep\6pevov
eaiyrjo'av'' .

Ka6' fjpepav

4.

'lijo-oC.

eKparrjaaTe pe.

etfiev

eV

per

rjpr]v

6.

e'pov

Kpivo) ovdeva,

fie

10.

13.

6aKa(raav.

Kvpie,

el<rri\6ev

eViOTara,

prjpaTi

Tco

(TOv

Kai e<T7r\ayxvl<T0ri^

'

9.

8.

diroKpltTei avTOV

vpets Kara ttjv trdpKa KpiVere,

Kai &pprjo'ev^

dyeXrj^^ KaTa tov Kprjpvov^^

fj

Ka\ anrjKBov Tives tS>v a-vv fjplv en\ to pvirfpeXov.

fii'

oXijf

rfj

fiia ttjs

ire

eVi ra vSara.

14.

vvktos KonidaavTes ovSev eXd/So/xex, eVl

16.

fie

emev npos

aiiTOvs

aTevrjs 6vpas.

tA nerpiiS^ "the rooky ground."

future deponent from Xap^dva.
ofioSvpaddv "with one accord."
Stj/ovTai, a deponent future given as the future of

2 "K-fipij/eade,
'
*

'
"

6pd<a.

\pevSopapTvplav "false witness."

iiael irepiffrepdv

"like a dove."
'

"they became silent."

* iffirXayxvlo'Sv " he was moved with compassion."
" ri dyiX-ij "the herd."
' wpp-qirev "rushed."
'^ rd elui9bs airif "his custom."
1' Tou Kfrtipvov "the cliff.'
" ayavl^eoSe "strive."
1' Xa\dau "I will let down."
'

iaiyiiaav

N.

Kai

rjpepa tS>v o-a^ffaTav els ttjv a-vva-

^aXdooi^^ Ta biKTva.

'Aytovi^effSe^^ elareXdeiv

iepa xal ovK

ttj

Kekevaov pe e\detv npos

arv el,

Tffl

Kol SavpatravTes eirX

KaTa to eltodos avTt^^^ ev

15.

yayyipr.
fie

el

12.

irpos vpus ev

Kai aTr^X^ew Kad oXi/v T^v noXiv Krfpvtrirtav otra

11.

enoiTjo'ev avTca 6 'irjaovs.

els Trpi

Trjv eicicXij-

kot epov eanv.

en' aiiTOLS Kai edepdnevaev TLvas aiiT&v.

eyoi

deov eVt *ladvvrju tov

TTvevpa deov KOTa^atvov oxrel Trepi-

*l7;a"o;ff

avTov,

6 pfj i>v

7.

pjjfia

t^ jrerpa otKotoprjaw pov

xal to avveSpiov oKov e'^rjTovv yjfevSopapTvpiav^

oi Se dp\iepets

3.

iTiav.

effi TavTrj

2.

epfjfi(0.

FIRST AORIST MIDDLE

82
Tlie clauses
1.

marked * should

And when

be translated hy

a Oenitive absolute.

the disciples had entered into the ship* Jesus sent

2. Then a certain man came to him and said

the multitudes away.

"What art thou doing here?" 3. What power shall we receive when
the Holy Spirit comes upon us*? 4. The day is drawing near iil which
the Son of man shall come upon the clouds of Leaven. 5. Take and
judge these men according to your law. 6. Peter went to him, walking
7. The disciples began to preach in the days of
Oaiaphas the high priest. 8. They weiit into the assembly on the
Lord's day according to custom. 9. I was with you daily in Jerusalem.
10. The high priest therefore said to the disciples "Who gave you
authority to do these things?" 11. The Pharisees will say many
things against the Son of man.
12. When the messengers of Herod
had departed* the disciples told him privately all that they had done.
13. But although he sent his own son to them* they would not receive
him. 14. You were astonished at his promises. 15. And when we
had toiled all the night* Jesus came to us walking on the sea. 16. And
while he was holding my hand* I received power to walk. 17. Who is
able to endure these things? 18. And while we were drawing near to
the city* the whole nmltitude began to rejoice saying "Blessed' is he
that oometh in the name of the Lord." 19. In the days of Herod the
king Joseph went down^ into Egypt taking with him the child Jesus
and Mary his mother.

upon the water.

THE FIRST

LESSON XXVII
AND SECOND AORIST

MIDDLE. THE
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. ADVERBS

The conjugation

of the First Aorist

Middle

Indicative
IKviraiajv

I loosed (for

own

Ikiaa

is

as follows

my

benefit) etc.

loose (for thy

XSo-oi

eXu<raTO

Xvcraa-Ba)

eKvtratrOe

\vtraa$

IKvuavTo

\v(ra(rdaa'av

benefit) etc.

'Kvtrdadoiv
'

eiKoyrmivos.

Imperative

koW/Sij.

own

SECOKB AORIST MIDDLE

Infinitive

Participle

to loose (for one's

\v(Taa-dai

own

Auo-d/iei/or,

Notice the presence of the

rj,

having

ov

loosed (for one's

benefit)
a-a,

the distinguishing

mark

own

benefit)

of the First

Aorist.

Second Aorist Indicative Middle are the same

The endings of the other moods are
the corresponding riioods of the Present Passive. The

The endings

of the

as those of the Imperfect Passive.

the same as

endings are however not added to the present stem, but to the verbal
stem, as explained on page 43.
of yivofim " I

The Second Aorist

become "

iyevofirjv

is

as follows

Imperative

Indicative

was

etc.

eyivov

yevQv

iyeveTO

yeveuoco

be

etc.

iyevofieda
yevea-df

iy4ve(T6e

yevetrdcoaav

eyevovTO

yve(rd(ov

Participle

Infinitive

yevfo-Bm

to be, to

come

to

yevo/ievos,

rj,

ov

being,

com-

ing to pass, happening

pass

This word is especially common in the New Testament it is an

example of a verb which is deponent in the Middle voice.
The form which occurs most frequently is iyivcTo "it came to pass."
Most of the Middle forms which are found in the N.T. are deponent,
and mast therefore be translated by an active verb in English.
In a few cases verbs are found in the Middle voice which denote
:

that the subject is acting upon himself, or in some way that concerns
himself, or is allowing something to be done to himself.
Examples are found in sentences 8, 13, 14 in the following exercise A.

The comparison

of Adjectives

There are three degrees of comparison

The Positive degree which denotes simply that the person or thing
denoted by the noun which the adjective qualifies possesses the quality
expressed by the adjective.

6-2

COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES

84

The Comparative

degree which denotes that the person or thing

some other person or

possesses this quality in a higher degree than

thing.

The Superlative degree which denotes that the person

or thing

possesses this quality in the highest degree, or in a very high degree.

Examples

He is a tall man.
He is taller than his brother.
He is the tallest man in the town.

Positive degree.

Comparative degree.
Superlative degree.

Superlative degrees of comparison are expressed in Greek by adding repos and totos to the stem of adjectives of
the 2nd dec, and to the stem of those ending in tjs in the 3rd dec.

The Comparative and

When
the stem

the last vowel but one of the adjective

lengthened to <u.

short the final o of

is

is

Examples
Comparative

Positive

Superlative

SiKaws

(SiKaiOTfpor,

rj,

ov)

(StKatdraroff,

la-xvpos

la-xvpoTfpos,

t],

ov

{lirxyparaTos,

iTo^os

(TO(^a>Tepos,

a\r)6r]S

{oKrjBforTfpos,

77,

ov
rj,

(o-o^mraToy,
ov)

ov)
ov)

ij,

>;,

(ahjdfOTaTOs,

The following adjectives form their degrees

ov)

rj,

ov)

of comparison irregularly.

Comparative

Positive

j;,

Superlative

dyaBos good

KpfiaaatVy KpsLTTuv better

{uparuTTos) best

KOKos bad

X^ipav, rjacrav,

(xfiptoTos) worst

rJTTtav

worse
TTokis

many

TrXfitav,

nXeav more

psiKporepos, eXacrtro)!/,

p.LKp6s little

TrXfiaros

iKuTTav

most

(piKporaros), eXd;(7-

Tos least
fieyas great

fiei^tav

greater

p.iyuTTos greatest

Adjectives in the Comparative degree ending in

follows

Masc. Fem.

Neut.

N.
A.

pei^ova,

G.

pfi^ovos

ptl^ovos

D.

p,eL^ovL

pel^ovi

fiei(av

fiei^ov
/ift'fo)

pel^ov

a>v

are declined as

ADVERBS

An

85

Masc. Fern.

Neut.
fiel^ova, fiei^a

A.

jiei^ovas, /ifi^ovs

G.

fifc^ovav

D.

nei^o(ri

adjective or adverb in the comparative degree is followed either

by a noun or pronoun in the Genitive, or by ^ " than" followed by a noun

or pronoun in the same case as the noun or pronoun with which the
adjective agrees.
.

Examples

He

is

wiser than his son.

c7"0(^(Tcpdff

or

a-o<pa>Tp6s

eartv tov vtov.

iimv

o vlos.

ij

Adverbs
Adverbs are formed from adjectives by changing the
pi.

masc. to

v of

the Gen.

I.

Examples

Adverb

Adjective
(^CKos
a-o<f)6s

dXrjdfjs

dear
wise
true

The comparative and

{'^iKas)
((ro(f>S>s)

aKrjdas

dearly
wisely
truly

superlative degrees of adverbs are formed

by

taking the Neuter Singular of the comparative of the adjective to form

the comparative of the adverb, and the Neuter Plural of the superlative
of the adjective to form the superlative of the adverb.

Examples

Positive
(a-ocjiios)

oKTjdms

The

Comparative

Superlative
(<ro(^a)TaTa)

(<TO(j)aiTepov)

(dXrjdeaTaTa)

{dKr]6e<TTepov)

following forms should be noted.

Positive

Comparative

Superlative

ev well

/SeXtioi/, KpelaiTov

{fiiXnarTa) best

Ka\S>s well, beautifully

better
KoXKiov better,
beautifully

(KaXXtoTo) best,
beautifully

kokSs badly
{jiaKa)

TToKv

much

The Comparative and

tj(r(rov, rJTTOv

fiSXKov more
vXeiov, ifKiov

more

worse

more

(ijiKio-T-a)

worst

p,aKi<TTa

most
most

most

(jrXeioTa)

Superlative degrees of adjectives and adverbs

86

EXERCISES

are not

much used

in the

scarcely used at all

its

New

place

Testament. The Superlative degree

taken by the Comparative degree.

is

is

Example
Being the least of

all

seeds that are on the earth.

funp&rfpov hv iravTmv t5>v

<rnepjia.T<ov

rav

Trjs yrjs.

c'jri

Mk iv.
The forms enclosed
the

New

31.

in brackets in the tables above are not found in

Testament.

Exercise 27

A
Learn Vocabulary
1.

21.

T^ 8e ejravpiov^, oSotnopovvTaiv eKfivav, Kal

dve^T) TlsTpos eirl to dafia^ irpotr^v^aadai,

Tjjs Tpo<^rjs ;

Kal Idiarai^

Ta dpyvpia

as

eltrlv.

eivtfTTevfTapxv,

fuxparcpos iv

17

iroXfi iyyi^ovTav,
^v)(ri TrXetdv ecrrt

6 p-el^tov

4.

Vfompot. 5. Kare\a/3oj/ro on avSpanoi aypafifiaTOi

6. vvv yap eyyvrepov ea-Tiv r) o'arrjpia ffpMV rj ore

oKr^Qois o^tos 6 avSptairos vlos deov ^v.

7.

els

rtj

ov;(t

Koiavve^ovXevcravTo dTTOKTelveiV Tov HavXov.

3.

iv Vfuv yevitrSa

2.

8.

Kal pi'^as

tov vaov dve^^iapyi&ev, Ktu dweKdoiv aTrrfy^aTO^.

Tr[

PairiXeia

fiivei TTLtTTis, iXiTLS)

rav evpavSiv

dyaTTTj

rti

p,et^wv ixvTov ccrrlv.

9.

10.

rpia raOra, fiei^av Si Tovratv

6 Se

vvvl Se

rj

dydinq.

pei^ova rovrtov

11.

ipxfTai 6

13.

Kat vvv Ti /ieXXets,' ^dnTia-ai, Kal dnoKova'ai rds ctpaprias aov, iwiKa-

\eardp,ev6s to
els

Ia-xyp6rrep6s

p.ov

Svopa tov Kvplov.

TOV McouoTji' iv

Trj vetfjeXr)

oiriam

oijfd,

irdvTfs ol iraripes TjpSiv i^anTiaavTo

14.

Kal iv

12.

pov.

Trj BaKda'a'Tj.

B
oi 8e p^el^Qv

1.

^Kpa^av Xeyovres Kupte,

dvdSei^ov^ TOV avdpaiTrov bv e^eXi^at^

3.

tj

eXerja-ov r)pds.

2.

trv

Kvpie,

^atTiXiatya vdrov^ ifXBev ck t5>v

TrepaTtnv ' ttjs yrjS oKoCfrat Ti]v (To<piav ^oXopSivos, Kal Iboii nXelov SoXop,&vos

aSe.

4.

ovSels ewi^dXXei enl^Xripa^ poKovs dyvd(j>ov^ inl

"And on

IpaTm naXaia-

the next day," iiraipiov is an adverb meaning

"to-morrow," tj agrees with itp^pq. understood.
2 t6 3S/ia "the house top."
* AypdnfiaToi. Kal ISiurai "unlettered and ignorant."
1

*
^
*

'
?
"

7T)

Si iiraipior

middle aorist from ii7rd7xw "I hang."

" show."
ij pacrtXuT(fa v6tov "the queen of the south."
ix Tuv trepkruiv " from the furthest parts."
MpXvM^l', t6, "a thing put on, a patch."
fidKovs d^vd^oi; "of undressed cloth."
dTTTJ-yfaTO

Avadei^ov

CONTRACTED VERBS IN
yap ro

atpei
5.

TrXrjpatijLa

dp^rjv Xeyft)

auTov^ aTro rov

vply e0' oa'ov^

eXap^iOTO)!', epot eTroirja-aTe,

rav

^eipova

ovv

irpaiTcov.

ovde

eKd)(^L(TTOv

8.

el

9.

Xeyo) vpXv pet^av

ptKpOTepos ev
Set

rfj

AND

ip,arinv Koi

6.

rav

87

Ota

^eipov

e7roLr}(TaT evt^ TOVTiav

or-)^l(Tp.a

d8\<jiS)v

yiveTat,

povTav

koX yivcTai ra etrxoxa Tov dvOpairov CKeivov

eya>

yap

byvatrBe,

elpt

ri

ekd^ttTTOs ratv

wept

Ttov

iv yevvr)TQis^ yvvaiKoiv

OTrocrToXcoi/.

pepipvare^;

Xotirajv

'la>dvov

^atriXela tov Seov pei^atv avTov eariv.

p^Wov dvSpairots.
And when Solomon had

6ea
1.

7.

aco

oiidels

10.

efrriv 6 be
TreiBap^elv

7j

prayed he departed out of the temple.

would not work for' his father. 3. The

robbers hanged themselves, for those that pursued them were more
than they. 4 "We called upon the name of the Lord, for he is stronger
than all the kings of the earth. 5. He chose Simon whom he surnamed
6. Behold, love is greater than faith.
7. Why then do ye
Peter.
delay to go to Jerusalem, for behold a greater than Solomon is there 1
9. They say
8. We ought to obey the king rather than the priest.
10. Ye took
that these days are worse than the days of our fathers,
11. He that is least shall
counsel together to slay the wisest of men.
become the greatest. 12. But he cried out the more "Behold what
13. Truly I perceive
things I suffer at the hands of my enemies."
that there is a division among them. 14. We cannot do the least of
15. Inasmuch as* thou hast done this thou hast done
these things.
worse than all thy brethren. 16. But he answered them more wisely
2.

The younger

of the sons

than his father.

LESSON XXVIII
CONTRACTED VERBS ENDING IN
The

oo..

a followed

by

a followed by
tA

AND

rules for the contraction of the vowels in these verbs

stated as follows

a<o

o or
f

irKiipiiipa airoxi

or

cB
77

becomes a.
becomes a.

" that which

fills it

up."

^ hi dat. from eXs "one."

"inasmuch as."
pepipvare "do ye take anxious thought," see the next lesson.
yevvriToh "the offspring."
Dative.
ireiflopxe'" "to obey," followed by a

'

uTT^p followed

"-

>
5

i4

So-oi/

by a Genitive.

Sn.

may

be

88

CONTRACTED VERBS IN aa
i

is

generally written subscript, except occasionally in the Present

Infinitive Active.

followed by a long vowel becomes a.

by a short vowel becomes ov.

by any combination with t, whether subscript or
becomes o, except in the pres. inf. act.

o followed

o followed

Present Indicative Active of

Present Ind.

n/ido)

"I honour"

Present Imper.

Tifuo (Tiiida)
Ti/ias (rifidfis)

TLfia {rifiac)

Tifi^ (nfidfi)

n/idra {Tijiaira)

Ttfiafxev {rifidofiev)

Ttfiare (rt/idere)

Tijiore (TtfidfTe)

TijiSnTi {rifidovtri)

Tifidraaav {TifiairtiXTav)
rifiaivTav (niiaovTau)

Present Inf.
Tifiav {niideiv)

or n/iav

Pres. Participle
Tifiav, ato'a, ant

TijiavTos etc.

Imperfect Indicative Active

erifiav

(fVi'/xaoi')

eTifiSifJutv

(infidoiifv)

eTifias (e'rifiaes)

iTifiare (cVi/idere)

irijia (e'Tifiae)

e'riiuov (fTifiaov)

Present Indicative Passive

Present Ind.

Present Inf.
TtfiatrSat

Present Participle
TtfioifieuoS)

rj,

ov

not,

CONTRACTED VERBS IN
Present Indicative Active of

(l>avep6to

Present Ind.

89

Oft)

"I make manifest"

Present Imper.

(jiavepSi {<l>avep6a))

^avepois

<j)avepov {(pavipoe)

{(fiavepofts)

<j>avepoi (^avspdei)

(pavepovTia (KJiavepoeTOi)

<^avpovpcv {(jiavepoofiev)
(pavepQVTe {<l)avp6ere)

(pavepovTi ((j)avp6fTe)

<j)av(poii<Ti (<f)avep6ov(Ti)

tpavpovT<o<7av (^avepoeroxrav)
KfjavepovvTOiv (ipavepoourav)

Present Inf.

Present Participle

<f)avepovv {^avepoetv)

(jiavcpatv, <j)avepova'a, (jiavepovv

cjiavcpovvros etc.

Imperfect Indicative Active

<l)avpovv (e^avepoov)

efjjavepovpev {4(pavep6opfv)

cffiavipovs {i<j)av4poes)

e<l>avfpovTe (e<j)avep6eTc)

etpavepov {e^avepoe)

e<f>ajfpouv {^<pavpoov)

Present Indicative Passive

Present Inf.

Present Imperat.

Present Ind.

(jjavepovtrdm

<l)avepovpai
(j^avepoi

(fiavfpov

(fjavepovTat

(pavepovo'Oa)

(pavepovp^da
(pavepova-de

(pavfpovirdf

(jiavepovvTai

(pavepovadaya-av
(jiavipovaBcov

Imperfect Indicative Passive

<j)avpovfirjv

The verb

fdo>

e<l>avepov(rO

i(pavepovTO

etjjavepovVTO

has

rj

Present Ind. f fS*

Pres. Inf. f^v.

ecftavepovpeOa

etpavepov

for a in the contracted forms.

fn,

i&pev f^re

^Sxri.

Present Participle
(pavepovtievos,

rj^

ov

90

EXERCISES

The Future and Aorist of verbs in am and o<o are formed by lengthening the last vowel of the stem before adding the endings.
Fut. Mid.

Aor. Act.

Put. Act.

Present.

Tifirjaofiai

nfida)

TiyLTftna

iniirjira

<jiavep6a)

(jiavepaKTco

<j)avepa}(ra

<f>avpa(rofiai

Aor. Pass.

Aor. Mid.

Fut. Pass.
Tiiuf6r]irojt,ai

eTijir)crajiiqv

iTip,rj6r)V

^avepioB-qiTOfiai

f<j)avfp<ocrdpriv

i<pavepa>6r)v

Exercise 28
Learn Vocabulary

22.

1. iirwddvero irap' alrav nov 6 KpiiTTOs yevvarai.

2. 6e6s ovk i(m
vtKpav oKKa ^atvTtav, navres yap avra fwo"tv. 3. ovtos 6 \6yos oil <\>avf~

povrai

^oatvTOs ev

yap Oebs
i-^oi.

rfj eprj^ua.

e^odov

ttjv

'Iwavou,

Si^fUi/

5.

7.

iv

ttj

avTov

dyanas

T&Tf earavpovv

9.

11,

ndvra

f'iaa-e

triiv

\4yei avTcd 6
to.

fBvrj

larai ire 'Irjaovs Xpurros.

fjv

rffieWcv^

irXeov

wXrjpoiJv

rovrav ;

6.

^lijtrovs

ovk

e'ia

10.

Hopevov, 6 vlos
ev rais
'IijiroOf

ev

<pojvrj

8.

5e raireivovvTas eavTOvs

Toiis

airra 8vo Xrja-Tds.

irepirraTelv

14.

fie

avrri atpa rjyaXXtcavTo ol fiadrjTai.

TaTreivoi Toiis vyjrovvras eavTovs,

Tov dyadov;
6e6s

eXeyov

4.

ffplv^

lepovtraXrjfi,

Ti

pe ipmras nepi
12.

trov f^.

oSols avTav.

13.

fie

Alvea,

to Saifiovia \a\eXv,

were making manifest the things which they had

heard. 2. We did not permit them to crucify the slave.
3. The king
humbled those that were exalted. 4. They are inquiring if the servant
5. Why do you allow them to live in our city ?
is healed.
6. Do ye
ye sons of men ? 7. The voice
desire to love the Lord your God,
said "Cry,", and he answered "What shall I cry?" 8. Now is fulfilled
the word of the prophet. 9. When Jesus was born in Bethlehem wise
men came to worship him asking where the king of the Jews must be
1.

born.
11.

The

disciples

God justifies the sons of men by faith and not by works.

men rejoiced greatly that the man that had the devil was
12. Rejoice greatly, for thy son liveth.
13. Humble your-

10.

And

healed.

all

selves therefore under^ the

in

due season.

manifest
^

2
'

it

14.

mighty ^ hand of God, for he wiU exalt you

name to this people and I will

manifested thy

to their children.

iJlieWev a past tense with a double

augment from pMWu.

" Under" ^tto followed by an Accusative.

" Mighty " KpoToiAs.

PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT TENSES

91

LESSON XXIX
THE PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT TENSES
The Perfect tense does not occur very frequently in the New
Testament. Its use denotes that the action of the verb is to be regarded as brought to its appropriate conclusion at the time of speaking
in such a way that its results still remain in action.
The Perfect has therefore as much to do with Present as with Past
time, since

The

it

describes the. present result of a past action.

Pluperfect or Past Perfect

is

the past tense of the Perfect.

no exact equivalent to the Greek Perfect in. English; the

so-called English Perfect formed by the auxiliary verb "have" is the
nearest equivalent that can be given, but it will not always serve to
translate a Greek Perfect.
The conjugation of the Perfect and Pluperfect of \va is as follows
There

is

PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT TENSES

92

There is a Perfect Imperative, but it is very seldom used in the

Testament. It is given in the complete table of verbs at the

New
end.

Note that the Perfect participle passive always has the accent on
the last syllable but one.
It will be noticed that in all moods of the Perfect tense and also in
the Pluperfect tense the first consonant of the verb followed by the
letter s is placed before

This

the verb.

Reduplication.
The Pluperfect has an augment in addition, although this is often
omitted in the New Testament.
Verbs beginning with a vowel, two consonants (except a mute and a
liquid) or a double consonant, have no reduplication, but have an augment
is called

instead.

Verbs beginning with a rough mute (</>, x, 6) have the corresponding smooth mute (tt, k, t) in the reduplication.

Examples
Present

Perfect

AfiapTavto

^iMaprrjKa

(TTfWai

eaToKxa

TrXrjpoa

TreTrXrjpajKa

<l>i\4a

wecpiKriKa

Beaofiai

Tt6eap.ai

Note that the characteristic consonant of the Perfect active

is k.

The Second, or Strong, Perfect

Some
without

The

by adding the endings direct to the stem

these are called Strong Prefects, or Second Perfects.

Perfects are formed

K,

following are examples

Present

PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT TENSES

The verb

Xa/ifiaKco

and the stem

their Perfect tenses with

el

under Xeya) begin

instead of a reduplication.

Present

Perfect Active

Xaii^dva

Stem

ip (generally given

.93

ip

Perfect Passive

eiXij^a

etXij/i/int

ftprjKa

f'iprffiai.

Examples of the use of the Perfect from

the New Testament
Perfect Indicative

Ye have

Jerusalem with your teaching.

filled

7re7rXj;pa)K07-

riji/

'ifpovaaKr/p, Ttjs 8i8a)(rjs vp.S>v.

Acts
I

have fought the good

fight, I

have finished

my

V.

course, I

28.

have kept

the faith.
Tov KciKov

aymva

rjyavicrjuu, Tov Spofiov TT4\fKa, rrjv nltrnv TeTr)prjKa.

2 Tim.

iv. 7.

Pluperfect

For

it

had been founded on the

TiBffiiKiaTO

yap

e'ni Trjv

rock.

Mt.

irerpav.

vii.

25.

Participle

Having been
Tre7rXr)pa>ii(voi

To

all

filled

with

Trno-i/r Trjs

all

knowledge.

yvaxreios.

Rom.

XV. 14.

that love his appearing.

7ra(7i Tois rfyairrjuoai Trjv

ini<f>av(iav airrov.

2 Tim.

iv. 8.

Note that in all these examples stress is laid on the completeness

and permanence of the action described.
A good example of the exact meaning of the Perfect participle will
be found in sentence 9 in

tlie

following exercise.

This should be contrasted with the meaning of the Present participle

of the same verb which is used in sentence 10.
Another good example is found in sentence 14 where icrravpa/ievov
denotes a permanent quality " one who has been crucified."
It is impossible to render this meaning exactly in English, as has
been said above- If the Aorist participle aravpadcis had been used in

EXERCISES

94
tBia sentence

it

would simply have denoted the

historical fact that

Christ was crucified.

now all been given. To repeat

person singular of the Indicative mood of each of these tenses
A list of the parts of the verbs
is called giving the parts of the verb.
occurring most commonly in the New Testament is given at the end.
The student should now begin to learn those which are given at the
tenses of the Greek Verb have

The

the

first

head of each

exercise.

Exercise 29
Learn Vocabulary

23.

Before doing this exercise the parts of the following Verbs should be
learnt: ^dXXo> (34), yivojiai. (41), cpxoiiat (68), Xafi^dvai (50),

Xfyw

(71),

opdio (72).
1.

"EWrjvas

elirfjyayeu

2.

tTTCD^bs

3.

naiSia, ea-xdrr]

els

&pa

to lepoVf Koi KeKoiv(OKv tov ayiov roirov,

Ad^apos

ovo/iaTi

Se Tis

eariv,

/cat

vvv avTixpttTTOi TToXXot yeyovaaiv^

/te

7rf7ri<TTVKas;

pajidpioi

oi

8.

TTfTrXrjpcDTai

ol padrjToi

9.

Kot

Kaipos

epxeTat Trpos avTOU Mapta

ewTa e^fXijXuflei.
10.

rj

6.

Koi iroXXa (rapara

as Ka\

ndvTtav t&v

IrjtroiiSf

(TV

irpoCJjrjTtav,

ij

tov

jiatriKela

d0

rjs

Btoi.

daLpovia

Kcieoipripevav dyiav rfyip6r)<rav.

koWlov
14.

ore Si

5.

kXIvjiv koi to Satpoviov e|eXi)-

^yyiKev

t&v

K.a\

"Ort eatpands

dne}\.6ov(ra fli tov oIkov

KaTiovpevjj MaydaKrjvrjy

/lof v/ids oiiK et\Ti<j)v el pj) dvBpiiirivos^.

tTTopaTos

Km

avTOv vvktos iXBovTcs K\\jrav

11. 'lovdaiovs ovdev TjSiKTjKa

ca>Ti\puTT0S^ epxerai

Ihovrei Koi 7ri(rrev(ravTes.

vrjTriov*.

avTrjs eSpev to jrmSiov /Sf/SXij^e'vow eVi Tr)v

7.

on

Xeyft aiira 6

4.

pi)

yiyova avr)p,.KaTripyrjKa^ to tov

\v66s.

npos t6v irvXava^ auTov.

e/3t|3Xi;ro

xadajs TjKovtraTe

13.

ai/roVy Tjpav

KoipMpevav.

eirtyiyvoitTKeis.

12. nnpair-

fjpels

yap 6eos
6e

etpTjue

KrjptKrfropev

tovto 8id

UpLOTov

earavpajpevov.
1. The days of the kingdom of heaven have been fulfilled.
2. He
has not injured thee nor thy friends. 3. We have seen and testified
that this is the prophet spoken of by Moses. 4. Then the young men
were astonished, for great fear had taken hold upon them. 5. The

'

^
'
*
'

"a door."
ivHxpKTTos, ov, 6 "Antichrist."
Tv\iiv, Qvos, 6

Kar^ipyriKa perf. from Karafiyiui "I bring to nought, I put away."

tA toO vtitIov "ohildiBh things."
"proper to a man, such as a man can bear."

dLvdpiiirivoi

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD

93

Lord hath spoken evil concorning thee. 6. They have defiled the house
Lord with dead bodies. 7. Thou must proclaim the things
which thou hast seen and heard. 8. The governor asks what the slaves
have done. 9. Ye have suffered many'things at the hands' of the Jews.
10. Then Pilate answered saying "What I have written, I have written."
11. But when I became king I walked in the ways of my fathers.
13.
12. The poor and the blind are cast^ at the doors of the rich.
Lord, in thee have we trusted.
14. They found that the devils had
gone out. 15. I have told you the words of the kingdom, but ye have
16. These that have kept the faith shall receive the
not believed me.
crown of life which the Lord promised to those that love him. 17. They
beheld the temple filled with the glory of the Lord.
of the

LESSON XXX
THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD
The forms

of the Subjunctive

Pres. Sub. Act.

Mood

are as follows

1st Aor. Sub. Act.

2nd Aor. Sub. Act.

\vai

\va-Qj

Xvrjs

\v(rris

fiaKjis

Xvrj

\v(rT]

jSaXo)

Xvcofiev

\va'<i>iJ,v

^^^Jt
^dXcofiev

\vrjTe

XvtnjTe

0d\T)Te

\va)(Ti

Xvaoxri

jSaXcucri

be seen that the endings of the Subjunctive are the same in

all these tenses, but that in the 1st Aorist the letter o- is placed between
the ending and the stem, and in the 2nd Aorist the endings are added
The endings are the same
to the verbal, and not to the present stem.
as those of the Present Indicative Active with the exception that the
vowels are lengthened and 4 is written subscript.
There is no Future Subjunctive.
It will

Pres. Sub. Pass, or Mid.

"

1st Aor. Sub. Mid.

2nd Aor. Sub. Mid.

XviOfjLaL

Xt$(r&}/iat

/3aXeo/xac

XiJ,i;

XixTTj

iS"^!?

\vr)Tm
Xvm/ieda

XvoTirai

^d\r)Tai

XvnafieBa

^dKafitda

\vija-6e

Xva-rja-dc

Xvwirat

XvfTonfTaL

^akqaSe
^aKavrai

At the hands "

5id f oU.

by Gen.

"Are cast," use the perfect pass.

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD
In these tenses the endings are the same as those of the Pres. Ind.
Pass, or Mid. with the exception that the vowels are lengthened.
l8t Aor. Sub. Pass.

\vda)

2nd Aor. Sub. Pass.

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD

97

Either the Present or the Aorist Subjunctive may be used in these

a continuoup or repeated action is spoken of,

clauses, the Present if

the Aorist

spoken of. The Aoriat is used more

There is no "sequence of tenses," as in

a single action

if

is

frequently than the Present.

Latin, and, if the verb in the

main clause

is in

follow that the verb in the dependent clause

a past tense,

must be

it

does not

in the Aorist

Subjunctive.

The Subjunctive is used in all clauses introduced by a relative

(2)
pronoun which does not refer to a definite person or thing i.e. all
clauses in which the word "ever" may be introduced in English after
;

the relative pronoun.

In these clauses the word av or edv is placed after the relative

pronoun in Greek and the verb is in the Subjunctive.

Example

Whoever

believes on the

&v

els

Off

irKTTevo'Tj

name

of the Lord shall be saved.

to ovofia tov Kvpiov

<ra>6r]a-Tat.

Clauses introduced by orav (ote Sv) "whenever" and ottou Sv

"wherever" and referring to the future also have their verb in the

Subjunctive mood.

Examples

Whenever ye depart go

into the city.

orav direXOrjTe elirfp^eade

Wherever the Gospel

is

els

rqv

iroXti/.

preached

many

will hear.

OTTOV hv TO evayyeXiOV Ki)pv(TfTr}Tai ttoWol aKowcovo"!.

Clauses introduced by ewj depending on a verb denoting future or

and referring to the futiu^e also have their verb in the

habitual action

Subjunctive, generally with &v.

by

eojff

ov or

eajs

Examples

Such clauses may

also be introduced

otov without ap.

There remain until ye depart thence.

ews &v i^i\6r)Te 'iKfXQev.
goeth after that which is lost, until

Mk vi.

f Kei fiivere

And

he' find

Lk. XV.

Kai TTOpeveTai eVt ro dn-oXaiXos etas evpjj avTO.

Tell the vision to no

man

until the

Son of Man

10.

it.

4.

risen from the

is

dead.
priSevl eiirrjTe to

Spapa eas oS

6 vios tov avBpairov

e'k

veKpwv

iyepdrj.

Mt..xvii. 9.

98

THE SUBJUNCTIVE
(3)

The Hortatory Subjunctive.

the 1st person plural when the speaker

in the doing of an action.

Example
(4)

is

The Subjunctive is used in

exhorting others to join him

Beloved, let us love one another.

dyawriToi, dyaira/ifv dWrjKovs.

1 Jn IV. 7.
The Subjunctive is used in
when a person asks himself or others what he is

The Deliberate Subjunctive.

deliberative questions,
to do.

What

Example

shall

we do ?

iroajtmixtv

Ti

Note that the Subjunctive

is

Lk.

always negatived with

iii.

10.

/x^.

Exercise 30
Before doing this exercise learn the parts of Sya

Learn Vocabulary
1.

3.

e/16 di)(eTai-

Xavrd

pc.

ttjv

4.

evToXrjv rov

dWa^ov^

Sytufuv

2.

Ki KTjpv^o).

pov,

6s hv fv

Kplvtre Iva

fiij

TTOT-f

Scdcpevov

XbatTiv

Tols

Tols

iv

els

iva rijv

6eov,

irapdhofriv

de';(i;rai,

eiie

5.

de^^erai,

or

dWa

ovofiari

tov ajrooT'-

yap &v dAj/ ttjv ^xV"

avrav inappva'av^f

Kal ravs 6<l>6aKpovs

6.

6<t>6dKpols.

ovpavois.

ovk

KpiBrJTe.

prj

vfiav

ras i-)(opAvas KapoiToKeK^, Iva kcu

Tmv ToiovTav natditav de^rai enl T&

Koi of &v epe

avTov o'OKraL dnoXetTeL avrrjv.

pi)

(2),

24.

KoKas dQercire

njprjaTJiTe.

aKovm

(1),

dirotTTfWa (35), Kpivto (43), Ktjpvcraa (28).

bf)(oiJ,ai (8),

8.

7.

Kvpioi,

e'aw

dijO'DS*

rl

pe 8fl

fri

y^r eorot

Tr/s

jroielv

tva

arada;

Kara vdvTa 0(ra &v XoX^ot; irpos vpds. 10. \iyapev

ipa^ Hoifiirapev rd Kaxd, Iva eK6^ rh dyaBd; 11. TravTorre yap tovs

9.

aiyrov dKoi(reiT0

iTTaxovs x*''^ M*^' favTmv, Ka\ orav 6i\rjTi Svvao'Se avTols fv jroajirai.
12. (jtevye els Aiyvirrov koi XaBi^ exel eas dv eiiro) crot.
13. optola eoTiK tj
/Sao'tXcia tS>v

oipavwv

fu/i.ij' fjv

Xa/3ov(ra yvvrj eveKpvsjrfv els dKevpov (rdra

Tpta^ etas ov e^vpatdij^ oKov.

The Pharisees disregarded the commandment of God that they

2. Whatever I say to you privately
tradition.
that proclaim to all the people. 3. What shall we do then ' shall we
1.

might keep their own

'

'

'
'

'
'
"

iXKaxoS "elsewhere."
Kappiu "I olos-e."

'

ixof"^"'' Kup/nr&Keis

5i)ffi)S

from

Siia.

a^o, then, in questions denoting surprise.

tffSi, imperative ind. sing, from eXvai "to be.''
ii "leaven."
dXeipov adra rpia " three measures of meal."
fvpSa "I leaven."

iipii, !)%,

"the next

villages."

OF CONTRACTED VERBS

99

continue in sin that grace may abound^ ? 4. Whenever ye see the

Gentiles in the Holy Place know that the end^ of the age draweth nigh.

"Wherever the Gospel is preached those that believe shall be saved.

Send away the children to the wilderness that the robbers may not
kill them.
7. God sent many prophets that they might teach this
people.
8. Let us eat and drink, for we must depart quickly.
9. Let
us go elsewhere that we may exhort the multitudes. 10. Whenever
we will we can do good to the poor. 11. Remain in the house until I
12. We have cut down all the trees that the enemy may not
call thee.
eat the fruit.
13. I will not drink wine lest I cause my brother to
stumble. 14. I beseech thee to guard my sheep until I find that which
15. Whosoever wishes to be greatest among you let him humble
is lost.
himself as a little child. 16.
Lord, reveal thy power to us that thy
name may be glorified. 17. Bring the garments to me that they may
be carried to the widows.
5.

6.

LESSON XXX[
SUBJUNCTIVE OF CONTEACTED VERBS AND OF
FURTHER USES OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE
The Present Subjuncti\

>'.

FURTHER USES

100
The subjunctive

of

flfit

is

as follows

Plural

Singular

Shti

ij

Further uses of the Subjunctive

The Subjunctive

is

used in

all

conditional clauses introduced by

edv "if" referring to the future.

Example

eav

shall all perish in like manner.

Lk. XUl.
wdvTes aaavTos aTroXcicr^e.

do not repent ye

If ye

fieTavorjtnjTC,

fifj

The Aoiist Subjunctive

(not the Present)

is

used with

5,
fu)

in

prohibitions.

Do

Example:

fjLTf

not get gold for your purses.

KTTja-r]6

The Present Imperative

^pvtrov

els

Mt.

ras ^covas vfi&v.

(not the Aorist) with

/xi;

X. 9.

may also

be used

to express a prohibition.

The Present Imperative generally denotes a command to cease to

do an action already begun, in accordance with the principle that the
moods of the Present tense denote action in progress.
Example

And they all wept and lamented her. But he said to them " Do
not continue to weep she is not dead, but sleepeth."
;

SKXatxtv 8e Trai/rep /cat eKoirrovTO avTTjv.

fie

antBavev aWa Ka6ev8ei.

The Aorist Subjunctive generally denotes a
to do

an

elnev Mfj KXaierc, ovk

Lk.

command

viii.

52.

not to begin

action.

Example
Whenever

therefore thou doest alms, do not sound a trumpet before

thee.

OTav oSv

Troifjs

ek(riji,o(rivr}v ,

/itj

(raXTriVjf eiinpoirdfv crov.

Mt.
In Acts

xviii.

prohibition in the

Do
fir)

we have an example

of both

ways

vi. 2.

of expressing a

same verse

not fear, but speak and hold not thy peace.

^o^ov, cii^a XaXei Koi fx^ (7Lai7rr](T7]s,

The double negative

oi

/iij

is

used with the Aorist Subjunctive and

OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE

101

occasionally with the Future Indicative in the sense of the Future

Indicative with ov, but with more emphasis.

Examples

Him

must

If I

eav

me

that cometh to

Tov cp\6fievov Trpos

8eTf

jue

I will in

ov

fiC

no wise cast
deny

die with thee, I will not

avvairoOavelv

ov

froi,

firj

ae

out.

Jn

CKjSaXo) e^(o.

iifj

vi. 37.

thee.

apvTjirofiai.

Mk xiv.
Frequently however, especially in the Gospels,
a negative future without any special emphasis.

31.

used simply as

it is

Exercise 31
Learn the parts of

Trpdo-o-to (29),

deXa

(11),

yiyvacrKa (55),

ia-6ta> (69),

TTlVcO (49).

Learn Vocabulary
KvpiCj eav

1.

pfydXji
3.

(fiaivfj

iav

pri

25.

pe Kadaplaai.

diXrjs bvva<Tal

2.

(j}aivrfa-ev

vpoiv

7rpi(r<rev(Tjj

rj

dtKatotrvvjj

ypappariav Koi

irXetov ratv

^apKTaicov, ov p^ fltTeXdrjre els ttjv ^atriKfiav rStv oiipauav,

pepipvT]tTr]Te

eh

as waidlov, ov
avTo eas OTOV

de llaOXof

Xeytov Mr/Sei' npa^Tji treavrio kokov, anavTes yap icrpev ivBabe.

rtjv

aSpiov.

5.

pf] eltreXdrj els avrrjv.

jrXrjptoBfj

iv

4.

prj

6.

TJj /SacriXcia

Xeyft)

yap vpiv

toC dcov.

7.

edv

otl ov pr] <j>dy(6

ns

fleXi;

ro BiXifpa

aiiTOv Troteiv, yvwa-erai irepi rrjs didax^s iroTepov^ eK Oeov iarriv.

vopitrrjre oti rfkBov

TO okas

Trjs yrjs'

KoraKvaai rov vopov

t&v

rovs Tvpo^rjras.

dXXa XaXei, xai

dyairare pe, Tas e'vToXds Tas epds

eltriv Tives

rj

Side ovt(ov oiTtves

ov

Tr]pi]<TtTf.

pfj

12.

prj yevcrcavTat

TOV viov TOV dvdpmrrov 6p\6pevov ev

Trj

Lva iiaiv peT' ai/rov Kai iva

eK^dXXeiv TO Saipovta.

15.

pf/

8.

pi)

vpeis eare

10. enrev 6e

11.

aianrr^irris.

iav

Xiya vphi

a/i^v

QavaTov

^atrLXela avTov.

dyavTjoriTe tovs ayairavTas vpas, Tiva purBov exeTe;

SaSexa

9.

eav 8e to a\as pcopavdjjj ev tlvi dXtirBqa-erai ;

6 Kvpios TIB TlavXco Mr) (j)o^ov,

oZv

hs &v pfj Se^rjrai Tfjv ^airiXeiai' tov Beov

14.

eats

oti,

&v tdaa-iv

13.

edv yap

xal eTvoirjaev

dnoareXXri KrjpvaiTeai Kol exeiv e^oviriav

ovv XeyereTi (jidyaipev ;

ij

Ti iriapev ;

rj

Tl

Trepi^aXdipeSa

do good to them that do good to you what reward have ye?

not bring Gentiles into the temple. .3. Let us not seek the
things of this age, but the things of the age that is to come^. 4. If ye
do these things ye shall be loved by my Father. 5. Do not continue
6. I will in no wise allow thee
to receive the enemies of the Gospel.
1.

2.

If ye

Do

'

vdrepov "whether."

Use

pres. part. o( Ipxopai.

FUETHER USES

102
to eat bread in this place.

upon

us.

They went

8.

7.

If

we

mercy
might ask him about
that they might hear the

confess our sins he will have

to the priest that they

9. And all the people were silent

messengers of Caesar. 10. If we love him we shall keep his commandments. 11. The slaves brought me bread and fish that I might taste
13. If
it 2.
12. Sin no longer, lest a worse thing come upon thee.
these men are wicked the Lord will destroy them and their city.
15. Do not
14. I will in no wise manifest myself to this generation.
carry wine to the slaves. 16. If the enemy draw near I will set the
17. How shall we buy Isread that these may eat ?
soldiers in order.
18. Let us love our parents that we may be loved by them.

the vision'.

LESSON XXXII
FURTHER USES OF THE INFINITIVE MOOD
The

Infinitive

mood, as has already been pointed

out, is really a

verbal noun, and, as such, can be used as the subject or object of a

verb.

noun can be emphasised by prefixing an article to

then practically becomes a declinable neuter noun.
Its case is shown by the case of the article, for the infinitive itself

Its character as a
it

it

cannot have

inflections.

by an Article, or the Articular Infinitive, as

sometimes called, may have a subject, object or other limiting
words attached to it. These words generally come between the article
and the infinitive and form with it a phrase equivalent to a noun.
The Articular Infinitive is frequently used in connexion with a
Phrases of this kind are generally best translated by an
Preposition.

The

Infinitive preceded

it is

Adverbial clause in English.

Examples

els

or n-pos followed

by the Accusative of the Articular

Infinitive expressing purpose.

And
and

they shall deliver him to the Gentiles to

mock and

to scourge

to crucify.

KoX TrapaSairovcrtv avTov Tois e$v(rtv

els

to ep.7ral^ai Kal p.a(mySttTat Koi

Mt. xx.

<TTavpS>ornt.

I sent

that I might

ejreiiyjfa fls
'

to yvS>vai

Spa/ia -aros, t6.

know your
Trjv

jrioTiv VfiSiv.
"

19.

faith.
1

Use genitive

Thess.
case.

iii. 5.

OF THE INFINITIVE

103

But take heed that ye do not your righteousness before

order to be seen of them.
Trpoa-fXfTf Se

SiKauxrvvriv ifimv

tijj/

fir)

Troielv ejnrpoa-dfv

npbs TO deadrjvm airois.

men

in

t&v avBpamMv

Matt.

vi. 1.

by the Dative of the Articular Infinitive expressing the

TIME DURING WHICH Something takes place.
And as he sowed, some fell by the way side.
KaL V ra cnreipeLv avrbv o /iev en<rev irapa ttjv 6b6v.
ev followed

Lk.

And

while

men

slept, his

enemy came and sowed

viii. 5.

among the

tares

wheat.
ev oe Tco Kaoevdeiv tovs dvBpairovs ^Xdev aifTov 6 ey^Bpos Kal CTreaneipev
fifaxm dva pearov roC a-irov.
Mt. xiii. 25.
7rp6 followed by the Genitive of the Articular Infinitive to be

by before.
For your Father knoweth the things of which ye have need before

translated

ye ask him.
DtSev^ yap

6 Tlarrip

vp^v

Syv

^peiav ^T npo tov vpds aiT^aat avrop-^

Mt.
followed

fierd

translated

But

dWa

by the Accusative

vi. 8.

of the Articular Infinitive to be

by after.

after I

am

you into

raised up, I will go before

pe Trpod^ta vpds

peTci TO eyepdqvat

els tt/v

Mk
Sid followed

by an Accusative of the Articular

Galilee.

TaKiXaiav.
xiv. 28.

Infinitive to express

CAUSE.

And

because

had no root

it

it

withered away.

Mk

Koi Sea TO pri e)(iv pl^av e^pdvSrj.

The

iv. 6.

Infinitive in Object clauses after verbs

of saying or thinking

We

have already seen that object clauses after verbs of saying or

thinking may be expressed by a clause introduced by Sti with a verb in
the Indicative mood. They may also be expressed by putting the verb
in the same tense of the Infinitive as that used by the original speaker
or thinker when he uttered the words, or framed the thoughts, which

The original speaker or thinker

used a verb in the Indicative, Subjunctive or Imperative mood to express
when these words or thoughts are turned into
his words or thoughts
are reported in these object clauses.

an object clause the mood

is
'

altered but

not the

See Exerciee 36.

tense.

THE INFINITIVE IN OBJECT,

104
The

subject of the Infinitive

case, unless it denotes the

saying or thinking.
This construction

is

of course put into the Accusative

of the verb of

same person as the subject

called the "Accusative

is

and Infinitive" con-

struction.

We

We

have a similar construction in English, but

it is

seldom used.

prefer to use the construction which corresponds with the

on

construction in Greek and to introduce object clauses after verbs of

saying or thinking with the conjunction "that."

Examples of the Accusative and Infinitive construction in English.

"The priests pronounced the lepers to be clean.''
"We know them to be guilty."
"I perceive them to be making a mistake."

The Accusative and

Infinitive construction does not occur frequently

New Testament after

verbs of saying or thinking. It is not therethought necessary to tre^t the subject at length here. For further
information the student is referred to the author's Syntax of New
Testament Greek.
The following are examples of this construction from the New
Testament.
in the
fore

Ye

say that

I cast

Xc'yere ev Bee^e^oiiX

out devils by Beelzebub.

eK&dWetv fie ra Satfiovta.
Lk.

How

do they say that Christ

is

Lk. XX. 41.

ttSs Xfyouo-iv tov Xpia-rbv elvai AavelS uidi/;

The Sadducees who say that there

ol

^addovKoioi

ol

\iyovTes

firj

is

no resurrection.

eivai dvacrracrtv.

Mt.

The

xi. 18.

the son of David?

xxii. 23.

Infinitive in Consecutive clauses

introduced by ware
The Infinitive is often used in Oonaeeutive clauses introduced by
Hare to express the result of the action of the main verb.
Example

And behold

there arose a great tempest in the sea so that the boat

was covered by the waves.

KOI l8ov

dm

iffi

(Tfia-fio! fif'yas

T&v KvfiaTav.

eyeVfTO ev

TJj

doKda-a-n,

SorerA

irXoioi/ KaXvjrTe(r-

Mt.

viii.

24.

CONSECUTIVE AND TEMPORAL CLAUSES

The

Temporal clauses introduced

Infinitive in

by

105

or

irpiv

"Before."

irpiv V,

When

the verb in the principal clause is affirmative the clause

introduced by irpiv has the Accusative and Infinitive construction.

Example

me

Before the cock crow thou shalt deny

oKcKTopa

irpXv

rpXs airapvrja-T)

(l>covrj(rai

thrice.

Mt. xxvi.

p,e.

34.

Exercise 32
Learn the parts of

tx'^ (70), Ka\ea) (19), airo6vj)<TKa> (53), jSaiVco (48),

TtUTTeva (14), ayairaa (15).

Learn Vocabulary
neptacrorepov

eavTov

npotTeixpv 5e

2.

26.

TO ayairqv tov deov e^ oXrjs KapBias Kal to dyaTrqv Tov

1.

Ta

(TTjpeLa

twv i6vS)V

dvop.lav yl/vy7j(reTai^

TTjv

Oetov^

elvai,

7.

opocov.

j)

dyairrj
6.

r/pas,

6vtnS)v.

OKOveiv

Tav iroWatv.

ottq

Kal Sta t6 ir\r]dvv0^vai

peTa Se to

o,

(riyrja'ai

TiVn \eyovcTiv oi avBpoTroi eivai tov uiov

Kal XiddtravTes tov

vopi^ovTes avTov TfBvrjKevai^.

anas KaTaKidd(rei

4.

ovK otfjeiKopfv vopi^eiv \pv(Ta

8.

Ta

yap tov eXdetv Tivas

irpb

3.

f Trotet.

TrXrjiriov ois

Koi

tov ^iXliTTrov iv

(rvvr)aOtev 6 IlcVpoff.

avToiis aTTCKptSri 'laxcu/Sos.

TOV avBpmnov;

oKoKavrcopaTcav'-

ol o^^Xot Tols Xeyofievots virb

avToi/s Kol jSXcVetv

^laKta^ov peTa

navTav t&v

irrri

9.

HavXov

rj

dpyvpa

r)

Xi'doj

to

ftrvpov e^(o ttjs TroXeoJS,

eav de iiTrtap^v 'E^ dvdpoiirav^ 6 \abs

maTevei yap

'ladvj)v

wpo^rfTtv

eivai.

10.

pkv

ovv ^rfiTTOS dnKpi6ri TJjpeiaOai tov HaxiKov iv Kaitrapeiaj eavTov 8e peWeiv

iv Td)(i^ eKTropevea'dai.
avToiis

nplv oKeKTopa

Kal i6ap^T)6r)(Tav aTravTes, wiTTe o'v^r/Tflv

11.

XiyovTas Ti icni tovto

12.

dpijv Xf'yo) (rot oti eV ravTr;

(pavfja^ai Tpls dnapvr)(rri pe.

1.3.

koX

Tois KOTOtKovo-w 'lepovordKrjp, aa-Tf KXr/drjvai to ^'^piov eKcivo

Kvpie, Kord^ridi irplv diroBavelv to

14.

jraMov pov.

15.

men.

fields.

"a whole burnt

offering."
grow cold."

'

oKoKaiTbiiia, -otos,

pass, from ipixi^ "shall

t6 Beiov "the divine Being."
reSrriKfvai perf. inf. act. from BvTfUKw "

<

^iryiJiTETai, fut.

iv

irdiri

Ax^XSapd)^.

ways is good for the sons

But while the elders were coming we remained in the
The young men did not enter the temple because the priest

2.
3.

vvktI

^peXKev eavTOv

dvaipeiv^ vopi(a>v eKTrf<l)fvyfvai tovs 8(rpiovs.

1. For to fear the Lord and to walk in his

of

Trj

yvaarov iyivfTO

Tdx "quickly."

to'

I die."
"

avaLpeXv

"to slay."

106

THE VERBS

IN

fll

spoken Festus answered him,

4. And after Paul had
Before the king saw the city he sent three messengers to its rulers.
7. All the
6. But we aU feared, so that we hid among the trees.
people believe that Moses wrote these things. 8. Depart from the

was dead.

5.

house before the publican comes. 9. But after the multitude gave
heed to the apostles they did many signs among them. 10. We think
that he benefited this people by teaching them to obey the king.
12. The
11. And he healed the blind man so that all men wondered.
young man died before the prophet came. 13. We believe that Peter
is an apostle.
14. They stoned Paul because he preached the Gospel
to them. 15. To love the Lord is better than gold or silver. 16. While
he was coming down from the mountain he commanded his disciples
to tell the vision to no man before they came to Jerusalem.
17. And
now I have told you all these things before they come to pass. 18. All
the Jews cried out that Paul ought not to live any longer . 19. But I
perceived that he was a wise and good man. 20. The peopfe gave heed
to John for they believed that he was a prophet.

LESSON XXXIII
THE VERBS IN

;i,

K8a>^i

Besides the verbs in at there are a few verbs of very frequent

occurrence which are called verbs in fu from the ending of the 1st sing,
of the Pres. Ind. Act.

These verbs have endings

differing

from those of the verbs in

a>

in

the Present and 2nd Aorist tenses. In the other tenses their endings
are practically the same as those of the verbs in o>.

important in the case of the verbs in /ii to remember

down in Lesson XVII between the verbal stem from
which most of the tenses of the verb are formed and the present stem
from which the present tense is formed.
It is especially

the distinction laid

The verbal stems of the three

principal verbs in fu are as follows

Meaning

Present

Stem

SiSiofii

I give

fio

riSriiu

I place

Se

'ia-rrjju

cause to stand

ora

BiBto/jLi

107

It will be noticed that the present stem is a reduplicated and

lengthened form of the verbal stem in all three cases. "o-Tij/ii stands
for a-i<m]fii, the rough breathing taking the place of the o-.

The Present and 2nd Aorist forms should be carefully learnt.

The other tenses can readily be formed from the verbal stem.
Prei

108

SiScofii

EXERCISES

109

Exercise 33
Learn the parts of SiSafu
Learn Vocabulary 27.
o oe

1.

ox^ots.

e8i8ov rbv aprov rots liadrjTois iva StSSxriv airov role

Ir/crovs

2.

(62), TriVra (26).

yap 6fbs

blba<Ti to

nvfvpa to dywv

finov ifuv iv iroia e^oviria ravTa woifts, ^

3.

e^ova-iav TavTr)v.
Vjuv.

6 Sc OVK ij6f\fv,

o^eCKofifvov.

9.

aWa

Trjs ^atTiXelas.

7.

aneKBaiv e^akcv avTov

t6v uioK, KOI jrdvTa SeSaxev iv

Sovvai

Tj

\ap^dvfiv.

ToaovTOv TO

;^a)^toi/

Trpoo^KwrjaTis poi.
TL \akr]aT]Tj

vvv (ipriKa

aXX

iip'iv

airoSos

els (fivKoK^v

13.

Tis

fj

12.

x^^p'^ ai/Tov.

ttj

o-ocfiia

aTridoode ;

eVi y^s,

15.

ij

16. naX orav ayacriv

troi

ttj

iiiuv

bmp^v;

pj]

icrri

14.

fj

dyand

6 naTrfp

pfj

pSXKov

eiTre

ttoarat

iav

poi

el

Trta-iav

Trpopeptpvare

cSpa tovto XaXetre.

orav yfvrjTai

6.

cas anoSa to

paKaptov

vpds napaSiSovTa,

o iav doOjj vpiv iv iKeivrj

irpXv yevicrdai, Iva

11.

8o6ei(Ta TOVTif

TavTa irdvTa

aroi Trjv

dodri(rerai

fioi tl tl 6<j)e!Xeis.

t^fo-Tiv fjfias Kaia-api :j>6pov^ Sovvat; Sa/iev

ebodrj pot Tratra i^ovtria iv ovpavco Koi

10.

Sois

avoXisTe kcu aTrokvOrjcrea-Bf, Si'SoTe kw.

OVK ebwKas fiov to apyvpiov in\ Tpdwe^av^ ;

heboTai yv&vai to jivirrripia

8.

rols alTovaiv avTov.

firTiv

4.

KOI but Ti

5.

ri's

17.

Koi

TTia-TcitrriTe.

you power over unclean spirits to cast them out. 2. This

me by my father. 3. We wish to give the gold to the
high-priests.
4. Do not give good things to the wicked.
5. The field
was being sold to the soldiers by the publicans. 6. They went about
giving garments to the lepers.
7. I will in no wise give that which is
thine to the Lord. 8. Thou gavest me water when I was thirsty 3.
9. Let us keep the commands which have been given to us.
10. He
who gives bread to the hungry shall in no wise lose his reward.
11. We were giving the money to the servants that they might give it
1.

I give

dog was given to

to the widows.

12.

The king has given us

this city that

we may

live

us not betray it to his enemies. 13. Sell all that thou hast
and give to the poor. 14. If ye ask bread will your father give you
a stone? 15. AVhatever we ask will be given to us. 16. Give and it
in

it,

let

This money has been given to thee that thou

Give us,
Lord, thy grace that we may
worship thee in spirit and in truth. 19. What is the wisdom that is
given to this man ?
shall be given to you.

may est buy

the

^iri TpctTTefoc

field.

= " to

17.

18.

the bank."

^ <j>6pos -ov, 6,

"tribute."

110

THE VEKBS

IN

jJLl

LESSON XXXIV
THE VERBS IN

/it,

TlBriiu

"I place"

TL0r]fJ,l

2nd Aorist Middle

Indio.

111

112

THE VERBS IN

10. Koi fit

fjv

fil

&v7r6Kiv eliT4pxi<r6e koX 84x''>vTai

Km

vfias,

itrOUreTa irapariSeneva

avbpes ^ipovres eVi KXtVijs avdpairov oy 7]v irapaXeXvfievoS] Km e^rjTOVv avTOV eitreveyKetv xat tfeivai avTou evtaTTtpv avTov.
12. KOI avTos aTreawdirdri dir' avrSiv axTft \l6ov ^oKr]v ', Koi 6e\s ra yovara
11.

Vjiiv.

npooTiixero.

iwep

fiov

l&oij

13.

Kvpie Sia
14.

(rov 6r)iTa>.

aTrotrToKav.

Toils TToSas tS)v

e\6ptyvs (Tov viroirohiov

1.

We

set beside

oi Svvafiai

ecfiepov

15.

itol

aKokovBtiv &pTi^;

Tr)V i\rv\r]v

ras Ti/ias rav ^apiav xai eTidovv irapa

KaSov^ ix Se^Uov

fiov

eas av 6S>

toxis

t5)v iroSav (rov,

them wine and water

place the sick in the market-places.

prayed to the God of heaven.

4.

3.

in cups.

And

How

2.

falling

shall

we

We

upon

wished to

his knees he

place the paralytic

They tried to place the books in the synagogue.

7.
Thou didst place
6. We will place the lamp under the measure.
me in a good land. 8. Behold all these laid down their lives for the
brethren. 9. Do not place this writing upon the cross.
10. This is
11. Place the body of the
the throne that was placed in the temple.
prophet in the tomb of his fathers. 12. The sword is placed in the
hand of the king. 13. The apostles placed their hands upon us and
14. I will come down that I may place my hands upon her,
blessed us.
and she shall live. 15. The lamps shall be placed in the house of the
elder.
16. The nets were placed by the side of the ship.
17. The
sick man was brought in on a bed and placed before him.
18. I am
he that placed my hands upon your head when you were a boy.
19. Ye shall in no wise eat that which is set before you.
20. The
bread was broken and set before them.
before his feet

5.

LESSON XXXV
THE VERBS IN
The

/it,

larrjp.t

following points should be specially noticed in connexion with

this verb.
(1)

This

Aorist in use.

is one of the few verbs which has both a 1st and a 2nd
These tenses always difiier in meaning in the case of this

verb.
\i0ov po\iiP "about a stone's oast."
^
"now, at this moment."
inroirbSiov -ov, t6, "a footstool."

'

ibael

'

dpTi

^tiffou

"sit down."

U3

larrifii

The Present, Imperfect, Future and 1st Aorist tenses of the

active voice of ta-n)ij,i are transitive and mean " I cause to stand " or
" I place " etc.
The Perfect and Pluperfect are intransitive and are used in the
sense of the Present and Imperfect with the meaning of " I stand " etc.
The 2nd Aorist is also intransitive and means " I stood."
The Passive is used in the sense of " I am caused to stand," " I
am placed," hence simply " I stand."
Practically the only passive tense used in the N.T. is the 1st Aorist.
(2)

In the tenses in which there

is

reduplication (the Present,

and

the Perfect) the first er is omitted and a rough breathing put in its
Present torij/ii for ctioti/^i, Perfect corijita for o-t'ori/Ka.
place
The breathings should be watched with special care in the case of
:

There is a rough breathing on all the moods of the Present

and Perfect tenses, and a smooth breathing on the augmented tenses
of the 1st and 2nd Aorist.
The Present Middle and Passive is only given for completeness, and
need not be learnt at first.
Notice that in the 1st Aor. Act. the usual <r, and not k, is found.
this verb.

114

tarrifu

EXERCISES

115

Exercise 35
Learn the parts of la-nnu
^alva

(63), 7rd<rx<o (73),

dyyeXXm

(33), (jyaiva (38),

(48).

Learn Vocabulary

29.

A
TOTC TtapaKaii^avei aiirov 6 SidfioKos

1.

aiiTov effi

to irrepvyiov^ tov lepov,

eoTT] ev fieaa aiirav.

TedepaTrevfjievov.
fiepl(rdi]' TTots

4.

3.
el

e^Xe^av

t^k &yiau iroKiv nal

eis

triiv

avTots earaTa tov avdpairov tov

de 6 ^aravas tov ^aravdv

ovv OTaOrjcreTat

fi

e(TTr)artv

ravra Se avrStv \a\ovvTiov avTOS

2.

^atriKeia aiiTov;

5.

eK^dWet, e<^' eavTov

to vvv TrapayyeXXei 6

on

6fos TOif dv6panois wdvTas TravTaxov iieTavoelv, fca6'

earrjirev ^fiipav

6. 6 iapuraios trraBeXs
iv /ifXXfi Kplvfiv Tqv oiKovp.ivriv ev SiKmoo'VVti.
TaiiTa irpos eavTov TrpoanjvxeTO.
7. 6 8e TeXdivrjs paKpodev^ earats ovk

^9e\ev

ovde Toiis d(l>dd\p^vs eirdpai els Tov ovpavov.

iardOri ep.irpo(rdev tov f^yep^ovos.

peydkji

Kvpie

p-q

arTTjo-rjs

9.

8.

de

^Irjirovs

be ra

Se\s

yovOTa expa^ev ^tavrj

apapriav.
10. ^era Tavra

avTols Tavrqv tt/v

dvearri '\ovbas 6 roXtXaiOf ev rals f/pepais Trjs OTToypa^^s^ Koi dTreoTTio'e

\aov

OTrltrat

11. el Mcovtreas Koi t5>v TrpofprjTav oiiK dKOVOvaiv, ovd^

avTov.

edv TLS eK veKp&v dvatTTjj

e^ovTi

Trfv x^lpa'^'E.yetpe

eitrev he

12.

TreitrBr^irovTai,

kw. aTrf^i els to peaov

ra dvhpi

r<a

^pdv

2.

ovSelr

koi dvaa-Tas eorij,

B
1.

avSpairefTis pe KareaTTjirev KpiTTiv

bvvaTat eXdelv irpos pe edv

dva(rTrjiT<o

airov iv

tjJ

prf

ear^dTji fjpepa.

eioT^Keto'av e^at ^rjTovvTes

rj

pepKTTfjv*

3.

avTa XdKrjaat.

ovvayayoLS earatTes TrpotrevxecrOm,

be avTTJ xV-po. dvearrjo'ev aur^i/.

prjTrip

rj

4.

Kol oi dSeX<j)ol avTOv

oir<os (fyavStatv tois

6.

to be Trvevpa
7.

dv6panois.
prjToos^

Upa t^ Xam

9.

8.

be

opovs everelXaTO^ avToZs 6

10.

iwoypa^

' pj/rus "expressly."

pspuTTys -ov, 6, "a divider."
ivereOMTo, 3rd sing. Ist Aor. Mid. from ivT^XKu.

'

kol

Xeyav

paKpbBev "afar off."

TTTepiyiov -ov, t6, "pinnacle."

!),

ev

Irjirovs

Irja-ovs

'

-^s,

bovs

on

jropeveade koi (rradevTes

irdvTa Ta pr/poTa T^r fw^r TavTr/s.

KOTo^aivovTiOV avTav eK tov

5.

Xeyei

ttws Spoiao'topev Trjv

6eov, ^ ev rlvi avTrp> jrapaPoXrj BSipev

eirCXa^opevos waiblov eoTfjirev avTo nap' eavTa.

XaXe'iTe ev tSi

ipds;

ol viroKptToi (^tXoOcrtv ev Tois

v(TTepois KOtpois aTroaTTjo'ovTai Tives Trjs TrlaTetas*

^amXeiav tov

e<j)'

6 TraTrjp 6 irepylras pe eXxucri; avTov, kol

"enrolment."

82

'

116

OTHER VERBS IN

/it

to opafia etos o5 6 vios tov dvBpairov eK vcKpatv avacrTJj,

KOI 7rape(mj(Tv iavTov ^avra fiera to iraQeiv avrov ev ttoAAois

MijSei/i etnrjTe

11.

OLS

12.

TfKpjqp'iois.

eonjcrax.

13.

Koi

ir

poaeKdav

fj-^aro Trjs

(Topov^,

ol

^a^rra^ovTes

(cm ivrtjaav paprvpas ^fvSfls Xiyovras 'O avOptonos ovtos

oi Traverai \dkS>v prjpara Kara tov tSttov tov &yiov.

14.

ayayovres 8e

avTovs earrja'av ev rw avueSplco,

1.

2.

I will cause thee to stand before

The

righteous shall stand in the

Caesar for

kingdom

my

name's sake 2.
3. Paul

of their Father.

therefore stood before Festus.

4. The priests caused the publican to
stand in the midst of the marketplace. 5. But Peter stood up and
preached the word to the multitude. 6. He is not here, for he has
7. Who appointed thee to be the ruler of this
risen 3 from the dead.
people ? 8. Then we arose and departed from the city. 9. You made
the king to stand in the Holy Place. 10. In the last days many
departed from the faith. 11. We stood without*, wishing to see the
prophet. 12. Stand on thy feet and take up thy bed. 13. We hope
to stand before the

Lord in that day.

14.

Then the

spirit of the

Lord

me up and caused me to stand on the waters. 15. After these

things many robbers arose and led away much people after them.
16. If any man believes in me I will raise him up at the last day.
lifted

17.

We

18.

How

commanded the soldiers to stand apart from the multitude.

shall we stand in the day of his wrath* ?
19. And standing
up he cried with a loud voice, " Stand apart from these men, and make
them to stand beside the king." 20. Those that heard these things
stood

still.

LESSON XXXVI
OTHER VERBS IN
The verb

ti//

occurs in the

,xt,

New Testament

o.'8a

only in compounds, the

most common of which are

d<j)iripj,

fnivitfp,t

The

"I send away, I let go,

"I understand."

verbal stem of

"a

irjpi.

is

I forgive."

The rough breathing passes

tropSs -ov,

"for the sake of" (vexa followed by a Genitive.

"has risen" 2 Aor. iylirTriiu.
" without "?f(.i.
" wrath "(ipy^.^s,^.

8
*

ii,

bier."

to the

117

alBa

i in the Present and Imperfect,

and the stem
lengthened before the ending
as in rldrjint.
All parts of the verb have therefore a rough breathing.
The forms of dipirjfu given below are those which occur most
frequently in the New Testament. Some of them such as the 2nd sing,
and the 1st and 3rd pi. of the Pres. Ind. are formed as if from dcjyla or
a tendency on the part of the verbs in in to assimilate their
d(^ca)
endings to those of the verbs in m is very marked in the New
Testament.
Note that in the Imperfect the preposition and not the stem receives
the augment.

reduplicating syllable

vowel

is

Prea. Ind. Act.

{a(j)Lr)fii,)

3rd sing. Imperf. Ind. Act.

d0r

Pres. Inf. Act.

3rd

pi. Pres.

^(jiie

a(j)ievai

Ind. Pa&s.

d(j)ifvTai

or

d^eavrat
2nd Aor. Imperat. Act. 2nd sing,

d<j)UT

2nd

d<l>tov<ri

pi.

acjjes

a(j)fr

2nd Aor. Sub. Act. d(j)S> etc.

2nd Aor. Part, dc^clr d(j>ei<ra d^iv
Future Active.
Future Passive,
1st Aor. Act.
1st Aor. Pass,

The forms of olba

"I

d<j)ri<ra

dtjiedria-oiiai

a^Ka
dtfiidrjv

know" which

are found in the

New Testament

are as follows
oiSo is

a Perfect whose Present So)

Pluperf.

Perf. Ind.

not in use.

is

Imperat.

Subj.

Inf.

Part.

olba
eiotim

olbas

ei'Sof

olSe
otBa/iev

jjdeifiev

lore

oiSarc, UTTe

vSfurau

otSaa-i, "(ra(ri

bivafjuu

"I

am

able" and iniirraiiai "I

Present Passive of

torij/ij.

know"

are conjugated like the

118

OTHER VERBS IN

/it

Imperfect

Infinitive

hvvafnu

riBvvdiiriv

8ivaa'0ai

hvvairai, hivrj

rfdwatro

Present

Bvvarai

ijbvvaTo

Swd/teda
BvvaaSe

rj^vdfieda

Bwavrai

rjdvvavro

Participle

Svvdfuvos,

t},

ov

TiBvuacrBe

Notice that the Imperfect has a double augment. The Aorist

r)Bvvr)driv also generally has a double augment.
(in stems
There is also another class of verbs in ju which inserts
ending in a vowel vw) between the verbal stem and the endings of the

Present tense.

Stem

Pres. Ind. Act.

oeiK

BelKvvfu

ax

oXXv/xe (SXvu/it)

Qavwiu
These verbs tend generally in the N.T. to assimilate themselves to
verbs in a. Such fu forms as do occur are similar to those of TiB^fu,
allowing for the stem vowel v instead of e.

Exercise 36
Learn the parts of

d^lT)'fu,

Learn Vocabulary

30.

I.

(cai

aiiTovs.
fiiiiv

2.

a<f>(Te

yap npeirov

<rTiv

6 8e

lijirovs eiirsv

el fifj

Ko\ov6i]<Tav aira.

xai

Tois ofjteiKeTms

Kdtrfiov.

Biva/iiv TOV 6eov.

fjjiaiv.

10.

dp.apTlm.

fiov Bel elvai p.e;

5.

apri^ gvt(o

d<j>iria'tv

oi

avrov,

eiirev aiiTois.

8e

edv yap

fifiSiv,

d<fi^Te

toIs

t'i

14.

on
jjBei

tls dvvarai

BUrva

Kai

i>s

ij/icis

dvOpmnois rd
8.

olBd

(re

rdre BeUvvtriv aiirm 6 dta/3oXoc 7rd(ras rar

7r\avdcrde

p,r)

elBores rds ypatjids

11. e<eivois Be rois %^a> iv vapafioXais

13.

4.

ev6ea>s d(j>evTes rd

^fuv ra 6<pti\^fiaTa
7.

rdre trvvriKav

3.

xai Vjiiv 6 narifp hjxSiv 6 ovpdvios.

9.

iva OKOvovTes aKovao-iv nal

aroi ai

6e6s;

a(jies

d<^r)(Tei.

6 dyios tov 6eov.

^asrCKelas tov

els,

6.

napaiTT&fuiTa avrStv,
el,

Tore

wepX 'Iwdvov rov ^aTrriarov

a^iEvai dpapTias

Tis

avrw *A<^6S

nXrjp&frai natrav BiKouxrvvijv.

dfjyrjKafiev

(7).

vvv Xcyo) Vjuv diroaTrjTe anit t5>v dvOpairtev tovtcov rol

ol fiadrjral Srt

Tj

Svvafuu (10), Sfixwui (60), ypd<pm

(49),

prj

avviaxriv.

i^rjTe'iTe jxe;

12.

ddptrei t4kvov,

ovk ^Bevre

on

it^lSe

txjv

ra irdvTa yiyverai,
u<jiievTai

ev toXs tov irarpos

Be xai 'lovBas 6 wapaBiBovs mirhv t6v tottov.

THE OPTATIVE MOOD

119

o-oi OTi riKov(ras fiav, iyi> 8e ^Siiv on navTore fuw

ravraeypa^avfilv ivae'iBjjTe OTL ^mjv e^ere alaviov, 17. 6e\<a
8e vfias etBevai on iravros dvbpos rj Ke<j>cL\rj 6 Xpiaros etrn.
18. Km oi/K
^(juev ra Scu/iovia XaXciv on jjSeurav airov.

ndrep, evxapuTTa

16.

aKOvets.

16,

1. Master, we know that thou art true.

2. God will forgive all
our sins if we believe on' his name. 3. Then the priests understood
that he had spoken this parable against them. 4. But since they did
not know this, they arose and went to Jerusalem. 5. Did ye understand all these things ? 6. I forgive thee all that debt. 7. I write

8. Let these men

worship the God of their fathers. 9. How shall
10. He suffered not the men who had been
I forgive thee for this ?
11. Know well that the Lord will not allow
healed to follow him.
thee to err. 12. I am not able to understand this unless^ thou teach

you that ye may know that ye are saved.

this to

alone that they

me.

13.

Who

may

is

able to

know

all his faults

were of good courage.

their soldiers

Know

15.

14.

They knew that

that

all

your faults

be forgiven.

shall

LESSON XXXVII
THE OPTATIVE MOOD. PERIPHRASTIC TENSES
The Optative Mood
is used very rarely in the New Testament.
forms are given in the table of verbs on pages 143148.
It generally expresses a wish

The

Optative

Mood

Its

Example

boy, mayest thou become

more fortunate than thy

father.

nal, yivoto Trarpof eiTv\c(rTfpos.

Luke
It is also used in dependent questions in the writings of St
sometimes with the particle av.
Examples

they began to discuss among themselves which it should be of

should do this.
that
them
airav 6 tovto
KQi avTo\ rjp$avT0 (rufi^reiv Trpbs iavroiis to tIs Spa elr) e|
xxii. 23.
Lk.
irpdiTiTeLU.
p4\\<ov

And

'!on"

eis.

'

"unless"

ei /iV-

PERIPHRASTIC TENSES

120

And

while Peter was doubting within himself what the vision should
seen, behold the men that had been sent by Cornelius...

be which he had

stood before the door.

Se iv eavra bajTTopei 6 Tlerpos ri &v

ojs

avdpes

oi aTretrraX/ieyot vtto

tov Kopvrf\iov

etr)

to Spafia b etdev, l8oi

.eireo'TTja'av

oi

eVl tov 7rv\S>va.

Acts

X. 17.

See the author's Syntax of N.T. Greek, paragraphs 131, 160, 161.

Periphrastic Tenses
In New Testament Greek tenses are sometimes formed, as in English,
of a part of the verb "to be" and a participle.
They are called " Periphrastic Tenses " because they are expressed
in a roundabout way iwepi.(j>pa^eiv).

The commonest Periphrastic Tenses are

The Periphrastic Imperfect formed of the Imperfect of
:

elvw,

and the

Present participle

And Jesus was

Km rjv Ttpoayav
The

going before them.

avTovs 6

Mk X.

'l7)(roSs.

32.

Periphrastic Perfect formed of the Present of elvm and the

Perfect participle

The people

will stone us, for

they are persuaded that John

is

prophet.
o

\abs KOToKidatTei

fluai.

The

rjfids,

neTreitrpJvos

yap

iarriv

'l<oavrpf

TrpoKJirjTTjv

Lk. XX. 6.
Periphrastic Pluperfect formed of the Imperfect of tivai and

the Perfect participle

And John was

Koi

The

jjv

clothed with camel's hair.

6 'ladpTis evSeSviuvos rpi^as Ka/t^\ov.

Mk

i.

6.

Periphrastic Future formed of the Future of elvai and the

Present participle. This form of the tense has the force of a Future
continuous, with the sense of continuity emphasised.

From

henceforth thou shalt catch men.

dwo TOV viv avBpanovs taji ^coypiov.

Lk.

v. 10.

Exercise 37
Learn Vocabulary
1.

Ihov

i]

bovKi]

31.

Kvpiov yivoiTo

fioi

kotA to

prjiid <tov.

8te\oyi^ovTO ev Tois KapBlais airav wfpi tov 'icadvov,

fii)

2.

noTe

Kni irdvTes
aiiTos fin 6

EXERCISES
XptOTOf.

ro apyvpiov irov triv

3.

<roi

iwvvOdveTO

biairopevofiivov^

0)(Xov

virofiovrjs

8^ ^ viiiv to

TOv Xaoi)

TT potrev^Ofifvov

airo

rt

10.

^o\r).

9.

e^a> rfj

&pa rod

eanv

^rjiuiTos^

KaiVapds

el/u

eirj

tovto.
6.

Bviud/jiaTos^.

12.

oi p-adr^rai

13.

before

many

Thou

witnesses.

4.

May it

shalt be walking the

who should be the

disputed

way

Ttjs

Koi ^v oXj;

7.

11.

e'lrj

rj

f)

ino

irapa-

koi rjirav ol

XiavKos 'EcrTMff

eTri

tov

^v yap SMctkiov airovs

14.

Then the blind man asked what this might be.

1.

Beos

ndv to wXrjBos ^v

avTov tls avrrj

be 6

eiTrev

oS pe Set Kpivetrdai.

of Jesus were eating and drinking.

de

'ifpovcrdKrip. la-rai irarovp.ivri

as e^ovaiau e^^av koi ovx i>s oi ypappareXs avTav.

pevos eva tS>v nai&av invvBdveTO Ti &v eo) TavTa.

5.

Kai

aKoitras Sf

4.

5.

iv yaivi(f* ireirpayjievov tovto.

Icadvov vrjartvovTss.

fioBTjTal

8.

avrbv

eirrjpaiTav 5e

ov yap

els ctTrayKeiav.

eit)

av

(jjpovfiv iv oKKrjKois.

iroXii enia-vvrjyiievri irpos Trjv Ovpav.

rSiV idvSiV.

121

koi irpoa^KoKea-d-

The disciples

2.

This thing has been done

happen to us according to thy will.
3.

of righteousness.

greatest.

7.

The

6.

disciples

Mayest thou become more

8. May all the workers of iniquity perish.

the multitude was gathered together to the sea. 10. We
11. May I become more like
desire to know what this saying may be.

blessed than thy father.

9.

Then

all

to thee,

Lord.

from

SiaTopeuo/i^ov "passing by."

'

Svpla/ia, -aTos, t6, "incense."

* ytavla -at, ^, "a,

' rjiia

-oTos, t6,

"a judgement

seat."

Sifri

SlSuiu.

corner."

122

VOCABULARIES

VOCABULARIES

123

Vocabulary 3
ayyeXos, ou

(angelos)

angel, or messenger,

dde\<li6s, ov

(adelphos)

brother.

avdpcoiroSf ov

(anthropos)

man.

apros, ov

(artos)

bread, plural "loaves."

SovKos, ov

(doulos)

slave.

Odvarof, ov

(thanatos)

death.

Seos, ov

(theos)

God.

Kai

(kai)

and.

Koa/ws, ov

(kosmos)

world,

KvpLos, ov

(kurios)

lord.

(same word.)

(anthropology.)

(theist, theology.)

(cosmic.)

\a6s, ov

(laos)

people,

Xdyos, ov

(logos)

word, reason.
(The termination
"logy" in such words as "theo-

(nomos)

law.

vofios,

ov

(laity.)

logy" comes from this word.)

(The termination "nomy" in

such words as " astronomy" comes

from this word.)

(oikos)

house.

fern,

(eremos)

desert.

fern,

(hodos)

way.
maiden, virgin.

oKos, ov
cprjfios,

ov

686s, ov

napBivos, ov fem. (parthenos)

The

N.B.

ov is the termination of the Genitive case.

learnt With the

words thus

ayyeXos, dyye'Xou

"an

angel."

It should be
It is useful

nouns in this way because the termination of the Genitive

shows to which declension they belong. All the nouns given above are
masculine with the exception of the last three. For a further explanato learn

tion see the next exercise.

Vocabulary 4
money.

(argurion)

silver,

(biblion)

book.
devil,

SevSpov, ov

(daimonion)
(dendron)

epyov, ov

(ergon)

work.

evayyc\u>v, oi

(euangelion)

Gospel (evangelist, evangelical, the

ev in the Greek is transliterated

apyvpiov, ov
ov

fitfiKlov,

Saifioviov, ov

(Bible.)

demon.

tree.

into "ev" in Latin).

L24<

VOCABULARIES

125

Vocabulary 6

dWd

but.

diro

from,

^aTTTUTTTjs, ov

baptlst.

yap

for.

yXSo-o-a,

tongue, language,

rjs

8e

ov

,8e(r7rdTi;s,

So^a,

(glossary.)

but,and.

(neverusedastbeflrstwordinasentence.)

master,

(despot.)

(doxology.)

glory,

rjs

by the Accusative case.)

by the Gen. case; the second form
is used before a word beginning with a vowel.)
(followed by a Dative case.)
in, on.

fU

by a Genitive case.)
(same word.)
(never used as the first word in a sentence.)
(followed

(followed

to, into,

out

e^

iv
6d\a(T(ra,

sea, lake.

r/s

ov

/laflijTTjf,

(mathematics.)

disciple,

yoimg man.

veavias, ov
ov, oiiK,

(followed

of.

not.

ovx

(the last

two forms used before a vowel.)

(never used as the first word of

oSv

therefore, then,

npo

for, before,

a sentence.)
(followed

together with,

a-iv

by a Genitive

case.)

(same word.)

prophet,

ov

irpo(l>fiTtjs,

(followed by a Dative case.)

Vocabulary 7
dya66s,

good,

ov

t/,

dyamiTos,

beloved,

ov

ij,

holy.

ayios, a, ov

alavios, ov

SUaios,

a,

(axoTos,

ov
ov

r/,

CTfpos, u, ov
i&ios, a,

KOKOS,

ov

7),

ov

novripos, a, ov

wpSrros,

t),

(aeonian.)

just.
last,

(eschatology.)

difierent, or other,

(hetero-doxy.)

one's own.

ov

7],

nuTTos,

eternal,

ov

bad.

(cacophony.)

faithful.

wicked,
first,

d wovr/pos the Evil One,

(protagonist.)

Note that alavios has only two endings. The masculine ending
used with feminine as well as masculine nouns.

is

126

VOCABULARIES

Vocabulary 8
aya

I drive, lead, or bring.

*avayi,va>irKa

I read.

*a7roKTftJ/o

IkiU.
I release.

avros,

he, she,

Tjf

it,

also himself etc.

(see next exercise.)

I baptise.

I teach.

SlSdtTKlO

I glorify.
I cast out.
CKfivos,

rj,

(see next exercise.)

that,

Jesus.
'lovSaios, ov

a Jew.

'laavrfs

John.

i)jpu(T<r<o

I preach, or proclaim.

Kpd^a

I cry aloud.
(see next exercise.)

oStos, avrj], tovto

this,

neiOa

I persuade.

TTC/Xn'tU

I send.

*wpi7rarea)

I walk about.

'^(rvvdyai

I drive together.

vcdf,

ov
I depart.

*i7rdy(B
<^epa>

I bear, or carry.

ffalpia

I rejoice.

The verbs marked *

in which they are

are compounded with prepositions,

augmented see page 22.

for the

way

Vocabiilary 9
dn-doToXof, ov
Sid

dtddo'fcaXos, ov
'

'Iijo-oOs

is

an apostle.
"through" of place or time, "by means of" when
followed by a Genitive, "on account of," "because
of" when followed by an Accusative.
a teacher.

declined as follows :

Nom.

'IijiroBs,

Voo.

Gen. Itjo-oC, Dat. 'IijiroS. It often has the article before

not be translated in English.

'IijffoB,

it

Aoo.

'IijffoOi',

this article

must

VOCABULARIES
epyartjs, ov

fvBis
dpouos, ov
'lepotTokvfia, av\

'lepova-dKrui

Kapnos, ov

127

a workman, a labourer.
immediately.
a throne, (same word.)
(Neuter Plural
Jerusalem.
|(incieolinable feminine noun.)
fruit.

\l6os, ov

a judge, (critic.)
a robber.
a stone, (lithography.)

Xvco

I loose,

juera

"together with," "in company with-"

ov

KpiTtis,
XlyOTT/ff,

ov

by a

Genitive, "after"

when

when followed

followed

by an

Accusative,
olKoSecrvorr]!, ov

ovpavoSj ov
d<j>6a\ii6s,

ov

ox^os, ov
Trpeir^vTepos, ov
irpos
TeXfflvi/s,

TOTTOff,

ov

ov

a householder,
heaven.

an eye. (ophthalmic.)
a crowd, or multitude,
an elder, (presbyter.)
" towards," "to" when followed by an Accusative,
a tax-gatherer, a publican,

a place,

(topic.)

viro

"by" when followed by a

VTroKpirljs, ov

a hypocrite,

Xpovos, ov

time,

Genitive,

(same word.)

(chronology, chronic.)

Vocabulary 10
(Latin "ager," hence agriculture.)

aypos, ov

dSiKLaj as

injustice, wickedness.

ifiaprcoKos, ov

field.

a sinner.
go away,

*d7repxop'M

*dT70<pivopMi

I depart.

(generally followed

answer,

by a noun

in the

Dative.)
anTOficu

I touch,

(generally followed

Genitive.)

dpviofuu

I deny.

Sexopai

I receive.

*hUpxoiuu,

fpyd^ofuu

go through, I go about.

I work.

by a noun in the

128
epxo/iai

VOCABULARIES

VOCABULARIES
ircipd^a

129

I tempt.

TTTifD^os,

rj,

OK

poor.

Samaria.

Sa/idpeta, as

thou.

<rv

Tv<j)\6s,

ov

tj,

vpeis

blind.

you.

*v7raKoia

obey,

(followed

by a Dative of the person

obeyed.)

wSe

here.

Vocabulary 12
adtKQ>

I injure.

*dvoLyo>

I open.

Spxa
^

blUKOVOSy ov

(followed by a noun in the Genitive. The

Middle Voice means "I begin," see Voo. 11.)
I serve,
(followed by a Dative.)
a servant, a minister, (deacon.)

e'Xfe'o)

I have

v8vai

I put on.

I rule,

BuzKovea

I pursue.

eiXoyca
e^Bpos,

on.

I bless, I praise,
a,

ov

*KaTOiKea>

hated, as a
I

on

dwell

rj,

(eleemosynary.)
(eulogy.)

noun "an enemy.''

in, I inhabit,

because,

*irpo(l)riTtia

fro^osi

mercy

(followed by an Accusative.)

(also "that,"

seepage

53.)

I prophesy.

ov

Vocabulary 13
I sanctify.

dyopd^d)

I buy.

away.

*a9rd'yct)

I drive

*dnoKdKv7rTa>

I reveal,

^aoTa^a)

I carry.

iyyi^a

draw

(apocalypse.)

near, generally followed

by a noun in the

Dative.

^eKKonra

I cut

down.

Although not really compounded with a preposition

has the form SitikSvovv in the Imperfect.
1

N.

this verb generally

130

VOCABULARIES
eXjri'fiB

VOCABULARIES

131

Vocabulary 15
aSvvaTos,

t),

ov

impossible.

Egypt.

A'yvjTTos, ov (fern. )

I take up, I take

aXpio

announce.
Bethlehem,

*a7rayye'XX(

Svvaros,

17,

ov

(indeclinable.)

possible.

while, until.

;
'TUpaSrjs,

away.

ov

Herod.
Joseph,

KatpoSf ov

*KaTaKpiva)

(indeclinable.)

time, season.
I

condemn.

kXiVtj, tjs

a bed, a couch.

KopvrjKios, ov

Cornelius.

Kafirj, rjs

village.

Mapidp.

Mapla,
a, as\

Mary,

(ii^declinable.)

pA^iupa, as

a sword.

oirioo)

after, behind,

0T

when.

TrdvTa

all things.

napa

when followed by an Ace. case "to the side of,''

"beside" (of places), when followed by a Genitive
case "from beside," "from" (of persons), when

I owe, I

(followed

by a Genitive

ought (when followed by an

case.)

Infinitive).

followed by a Dat. case "near," "at the house

of" (of persons).
jrapaKvTLKOSj ov
TTOTrjpiov, ov

a paralytic.
a cup.

(Tireipa

I sow.

aravpos, ov

OTpaTiaTtjs, ov
<l>atva)

a soldier.
I manifest, I show.

^apio'atos, ov

a Pharisee.

KJiBeipio

I destroy.

(f)v\fi, r]S

Xnpa, as

cross.

a tribe.
a widow.
when, as.

132

VOCABULARIES

Vocabulary 16
attov auavos, o

an

dXfKTmp oKeKTopos, 6

a cock,

age.

dfiTTcXav dfiTreXauos, 6

a vineyard,

Spxav apxovTos,

a ruler, (monarchy.)
a star,
an image,

dtrrrip diTTepos, 6

fl<av (Ikovos,

fj

hope,
6vpa, as,

fj

\ap.rrds \afi7rdBos,
fiT/V

a leader,
a door,
a lamp,
a month,
a bridegroom,

ijyf/xtoi' fiye/iovos,

fj

lujvos, 6

vv/KJiios, ov, u

night,

VV^ VVKTOS, ^
oSovs oSdiToy, 6
Trals waiSos, 6

nirpos,

ov,

or

a tooth.
a child, a boy or

fj

girl,

(pedagogue.)

Peter,

(5

(rakiTiyi a-akwiyyos, 6

a shepherd,
a trumpet,

<rdp^ aapKos,

flesh,

noiiiT}v Ttoifiivos, 6

tj

moTTip iraynjpos, 6

a saviour,

rpels

three,

<l>v\a^ (fyvKoKos, 6

a guard.

make a

I call, I

noise, (of a cook) I crow

xdpis X"P"''i V

grace, favour.

^iTav

a garment, especially an under garmen

;(tTi'or, 6

or shirt.

Vocabulary 17
mp.a

aifJuiTos,

blood,

to

dvr]p dvSpos, 6
a<l><ns

d^iaeas,

tj

$anTurp,a ^anTio'iiaros, to

^avCKtvs ^aaikeas, 6

(haemorrhage.)

a man, a husband.
remission, forgiveness.

baptism.
a king.

yovu yovaros, to

a race, a nation, a generation.

a knee.

ypdiifia ypd/iiiaTos, to

a letter (of the alphabet).

ypafijxareii ypap.p.aTi(os, 6

yivos yfvovs, to

scribe.

VOCABULARIES
yvvii

yvvaKos,

a woman, wife,

fj

eras erovs, to

ro

will.

fj

a hair.
a daughter.

fi

dvyarrip Bvyarpos,

lx6vs IxBvos, 6

Kvav KVVOS, 6

a dog.

KtaKJjOSf

ov

17,

(Cynic.)

a mother.

i)

an

oSs cords, TO

iroKis iroXeaSj

to

(Latin " mater.")

ear.

a father.

waTrjp irarpos, 6
TTvevfia TTvev/jiaTOSj

spirit,

(Latin "pater.")

wind,

(pneumatic.)

a city, (politics.)
a foot, (chiropodist.)
a fire, (pyrotechny.)
a wonder, a miracle.
water,
(hydraulic, hydropathy.)

fj

7ro86s, 6

irvp n'vposy to

Tepas TepaTos, to

vSap vSaros, to
<j)5)s (jxarros,

to

light,

Xfip

a hand,

X"Ph

dumb.

repentance.

T)

p.^Trjp prjTpos,

wovs

fish.

dull, deaf,

IKTavoia, Of,

(gynaecology.)

a year.

SfXrjfjui 6e\r]fiaTos,

6pi^ rpixos,

133

(phosphorus.)
(chiropodist.)

Vocabulary 18
aXrjBfis, d\rid4s

true.

dvatTTatns dvaaTd(rfas, ^

resurrection.

dpxupevs dpxtfpeos,

a high priest.
weak, sick.

dadfvfjs, es

a^piui/, a<f>pov

foolish.

yovfvs yovinK, 6
eBvoS ^dvQVS, TO

a father, an ancestor, in the pi. parents.

David, (indeclinable.)
a race, in the pi. the Gentiles.

fl

if.

AaveiS, Aa/3/$, o

els, fiia,

one.

ev

than.

tepevs iepeas, 6

Kpljia KpifUlTOS, TO

a judgement, a sentence, a condemnation.

Kpiaris Kpiircms,

lidWov

a judgement.
more.

pxyas, /ifyoKri, fieya

great.

fj

priest.

134

VOCABULARIES
no one (with the Imperative, Infinitive

litjSeis, HJjbeiila, fitjbfv

etc.).

no more.
VfKpos,

a,

ov

dead,

(necropolis.)

a name,

ovdels, oi/befila, oitbev

(synonym.)
a hill, a mountain,
no one. (with the Indicative.)

was, naira, irav

all,

ovofia ovoptaTos, to

opos opovs, TO

irioTis ir'urreais,

many, much,

TToXuf, 7ro\X^, iroXt!

prilia pTjpaTOS,

UTOpa

darkness.

trwepiioTos, to

(TTOfiaTOS,

a mouth,
a body,

TO

aafia (raparos, to
vyifjs

(polygon.)

a word, a saying,

to

iTKoros tTKorovs, TO
o-JTf'p/ia

every,

faith.

rj

whole, healthy.

vyiis

(hygienic.)

Vocabulary 19
aKadapTos, ov

unclean.

*a/i^(^aXXo>

throw round,

throw on
used of a

that, especially
'Avavias, 6

Ananias.

'AvSpeas, ov, 6

Andrew.

FaXtXaid, ay,

Galilee.

fj

*8ia(rrreip(a

*e^epXopM
evaYy(\i(opai

eios,

I go into, I enter.
go out.
I preach the Gospel.

'WXfias, 6

MavoTjS,

and

I scatter abroad, I disperse.

*fl(repxopai Fut. ela-cKeva-opm

this side
net.

Elijah.

Moses.

become

*jrapayivopai

*napdyio

go to.
I pass by.

near, I

am

present, I approach,

Si/Acoi/

Sipavos, 6

I lead past.)

five

TTCOS

SaTavas gen. Sarava,

(lit.

thousand,
how.

nfvTaKi(r)(i\ioi

Satan.

Simon.

This is a compound word and is augmented like a verb oompounded

with a preposition.
1 Aor. Mid. eiayyeKiaipriv.
1

VOCABULARIES
<r7ripa(r(rta

135

136
ITVVd
TIS Ti
ris Tl

VOCABULARIES
',

ov, TO

a council. (Sanhedrin.)
who? which? what?
a certain person, a certain thing.

Vocabulary 21
oKrjBas

VOCABULARIES

Vocabulary 22
dyaWida

137

138

VOCABULARIES
From

this point verbs

compounded with a preposition

are no longer marked.

VOCABULARIES
e^o)

139

140
8f|toi, a, ov

VOCABULARIES

VOCABULARIES
iravTa^ov

141

napio-nifu

everywhere.
In the Transitive tenses "I cause to stand

naioiiai

I cease.

reKfirjpioVj ou, to

a certain proof,

beside," " I present."

va-repoSf a, ov

last,

false.

Vocabulary 30
by a

aKoXovBia

I follow,

d(j)iTffU

I let go, I let alone, I allow, I forgive.

(followed

show.

SflKVVfU

fv6eas

immediately.

ev-)(apuTria>

I thank.

daptreca

am

ojba

know.

ovpdvios, a, ov

heavenly.

o^iiKeTTis, ov, 6
otjifiXrjpaf arof,

to

Dative.)

(Eucharist.)

of good courage.

a debtor.
a debt.

TrdvTOTC

always.

irapdirTatpOj aTOSj to

7r\avdop.ai

I err.

npinov

fitting.

(Tvvir]iu

Tare

then,

dXX^Xovr,

one another.

a transgression.

fault,

(planet.)

understand.
(at that time.)

Vocabulary 31
a

as,

aTtaXeia, as,

fi

(Nominative not in

destruction.

SiaKoyi^opai

I discuss.

hiairopivop,aL

eirepayrdto

I ask.

cTncvvdya

I gather together to.

vr)tjTvai

I fast.

naTia

Trpoa-KoKeaj

I call to, I

virop.ovr),
(fipoveto

rjs,

f/

make my way

through.

trample on.

patience.
I think.

summon.

use.)

TABLES OF VERBS
THE REGULAR VERB
As there is no single verb in Greek which is found in every tense,
has been found necessary in the following table to give tenses from
several verbs in order to present it complete.
The tenses of the verb Xum are given as far as possible, and the
tenses which do not occur in that verb are supplied from the verbs
it

TrdiTxa, yiveirdai, (nreipeiv.

are

The names of the

commonly called

tenses given in brackets are those by which they

in

Greek grammars.

They

are however in

many

cases misleading {Short Syntax, sections 83, 84).

we are compelled by the uses of grammarians

name "tense" in connection with the forms of the Greek
directs our attention too much to the time of the action of

It is unfortunate that

to use the
verb.

It

it was the state', rather than the time ', that was most
prominently before the mind of a Greek. The time of the action of
the verb is often left to be inferred from the context, and cannot be
certainly told from the form of the verb.
This is almost invariably
the case with moods other than the Indicative, and is sometimes the
case in the Indicative mood itself.
To the Greek mind the forms to which we give the names " Present
and "Imperfect" denoted continuous or repeated action.
The forma to which we give the name "Perfect," or "Pluperfect"
denoted action complete at the time of speaking, the results of which
were regarded as still existing.
The forms to which we give the name "Aorist" denoted a simple,
indefinite action, and were always used where no stress was laid on the
continuity, completion, or incompletion of the action denoted by the

the verb, whereas

verb.

The Future

tense in Greek, as in EugUsh, refers to future time

and is thus an exception to the principle that the

in all its moods,

tenses of the

moods other than the Indicative do not denote time

Greek.
'

See pages 177, 178.

in

THE REGULAR VERB

143

Tenses denoting continuous or repeated action

Active Voice
(1)

In Present time.

In Past time.
(2)
(Imperfect Indicative)

(Freseut Indicative)

\va

e\vov

"Kveis

eKvfs

"Kiel

eKve

Xiofiev
"Kvere

iXvere

\vov(Ti

eXvov

At a time denoted by the

(3)

(Present Imperative)

context;
(Present Optative)

(Present Subjuuetive)

Xvoifu
Xu7/S

\vois

Xvere

\vri

Xvoi

\viT<o(rav or \vovTa>v

Xvoifiev

Xvoififv

Xut/Tf

Xvoire
\voiev

Xvao't

(Present Participle)

(Present Infinitive)

\v0P, Xvovtra, \vov

Xiieiv

\vovTos

(1)

K.r.X. (see p. 72).

Middle and Passive Voice

In Past time.
In Present time.
(2)
(Imperfect Indicative)

(Present Indicative)

eXvofiTjv

Xuo/iai
XiJi;

or Xuet

c'Xuou

Xverai

eXuero

Xud/icfla

eXvofieda

Xveo-Bf

eXvovTO

Xvovrai
(3)

At a time determined by the

(Present Imperative)

(Present Subjunctive)

context.
(Present Optative)

\vov

Xiafiai

Xvoifiriv

\v4it6(o

Xu.17

Xvoto

\vea-de

Xuijrat

Xuotro

Xvea-BuTav or \veir6av

XvafJteOa

Xvoi/ieOa

(Present Infinitive)
"KveirOai

XvrjaBc

XvoLtrde

Xiiavrai

XvOlVTO
(Present Participle)
Xvofievos,

I),

ov

144

THE REGULAR VERB

Tenses denoting action in Future time

THE REGULAR VERB

(2)

At

145

a time determined by the context.

(First Aorist Imperative)

(First Aorist Subjunctive)

Xv(TOV

(First Aorist Optative),

Xitrmfu

Xucro)

\v<raLs or Xucetac

\v(raT

\va-aL or XvtreLe

Xvarji

\v<rdTa>(Tav or \v<rdvTav

Xvcraifiev

XuoTjTe

Xvcotre

Xvo'OKrt

Xvaaiev or

Xutrefai/

(First Aorist Participle)

(First Aorist Infinitive)

Xiaas, Xio'aa'a, XC(rav

\v<Tai

XixravTos k.t.X. (see p. 73).

(Second Aorist
Imperative)

(Second Aorist

(Second Aorist

Subjunctive)

Optative)

wd6e

n-dSa

Trddoifu

irdBrjs

ndOois

TToBere

ndSrj

irdSoi

iradeTaaav or iradovTav

irddafiev

ndOoifiev

(Second Aorist Infinitive)

TrdSrjre

irdBoiTc

Trddao'i

TrdSouv

(Second Aorist Participle)

naSetv

Tra^coi/, 7raSov(ra,

iraSov

irddovTos K.T.X. (see p. 72, as Xvav).

Middle Voice
(1)

(First Aorist Indicative)

In past time.
(Second Aorist Indicative)

iXvadfj-riv

eyevofiTjv

eXvcra

eyevov

iXviraTO

eyivsTO

e\v(rdiifda

eyevo/ieBa

iKv<ra(r6f

cyiveade

eXvaavTo

iyevovrq

10

146

THE REGULAR VERB

(2)

At a time determined by the

(First Aorist Imperative)

(First Aorist Subjunctive)

Xvtrai

context.
(First Aorist Optative)

XviTa/jim

\vird(r6a>

XviTOLO

\vcratr6e

XvcrrjTcu,

XitroiTO

Xvtrdo'&atrav or \v(rd(rOa)v

XvaafieBa

\v<raiiie6a

\virauT6e
\v<raivTO

\v(r<i>VTai

(First Aorist Infinitive)

(First Aorist Participle)

\va'a(r6at

Xvaafievos,

(Second Aorist

ov

(Second Aorist

(Second Aorist
Subjunctive)

Imperative)

r),

Optative)

yevov

yivafitu

yVOLfl7)V

yeve<T6a>

yevrj

yevoLo

ycvecdc

yevijTai

ydvoiTO

ym>c<r9ttMrav or yevcirBcav

yevafieffa

ycvoifuda

yevriadc

yevourdf

yevoatrai

yevoivTo

(Second Aorist Infinitive)

(Second Aorist Participle)

yeviaSai

yevofievos,

17,

ov

Passive Voice
(1)

In Past time.

(First Aorist Indicative)

(Second Aorist Indicative)

eKvOr/p

itrirapipi

ikvBijs

c(nTaprjs

eKvari

eandprj

eXvOTjfiev

etrndprjfiev

e\v6t)Te

itrirdprp'e

eXvorjaav

trirdpr](rav

(2)

At a time determined by the

(First Aorist Imperative)

(First Aorist Subjunctive)

context.
(First Aorist Optative)

XvBtiti

\v6&

\vdeLJiv

Xydrfrm

\v6tjs

XvBeirjS

XvBiyrf

Xvdxi

Xydeirj

\v6riratrav or \vB4vtwu

\vd&p,ev

XvBfiripev or XvdfXpev

XvO^Tt

\vdeir)Te or XvdcTre

\v6S)(Ti

XvOfiTjtrav or XvBeitv

THE REGULAR VERB

(First Aorist Infinitive)

(First Aorist Participle)

147

THE REGULAR VERB

148
(3)

At a time determined by

CLASSES OF VERBS
.9

*<

149
>

&

>

I.

I.

J- J-

I-

-a

&

1-^

3- a.

is

|if
s o

?.<S

So

fc

e
Si

^oS

t:

S
t
-fe

CLASSES OF VERBS

150

js

.5

is3

'^;5a

.ss

;f^

ag
a

<SJ

^-JS^.

.a

as

;,

agisg.

"O

'mSP'''IS

ffl

<s

.?"

I^g-

?: ?:

-e

i.

^ #

"I

II

""
I

^^g

iy

"IB

i=?

KS

"to

OS

.La

litb

4}
ubb

iCiti
iCi

ft

Mi
"
-

CO

.3

"<ib

.3

,3 "a.

Mb

**

5!

-S
-g

"B

-to

tl*

*to

to

"to *<

.2

*ra-a-Sv
t4
<

|i
bt-

It
ub

CS

S^

-6

^1

N
6-K
-e-K

? a

-B"iS

ig
bC

g 3

JJ
Mb

CLASSES OF VERBS

2.

s>

IBO
s

a
f^

5 ao
"Si

8
"S

C 3

fe

<a.

.i

b .

.S -S

^I
>

i b
Cc4

a -3

<a b

C3

0*3.

&

a.

151

CLASSES OF VERBS

152

g-^^-i

p. "^ -^

taSgo
P^

: a. 5:

a^s^l"

-^

"^

Mao
3-^
B

^,33
o3aSg
4

fe

^gl^g*

a.

*"=

Si

'J

0-eT3aB-

"si

I'll!}

.d

1
1
<Q.S

93

p-

-^

..sis'!

';:
:d

<u

^1

-s

-i-i

S
-*^

a.
b^

d
i

-S

SB

W*

'i ih! illi

S3bi<-

o
a
C

~a3ga

M^sa
,3aa
^"S'O

:S

'"ab|

<5>'-3R

153

GLASSES OF VERBS

<s
a.

HI

Hmao

sSS

-It Q. Q. -.
e-

-^ .S

J.

-So

3-3-3-

-5

8
c3

1^

>

APPENDIX

PREPOSITIONS
Prepositions are words joined with, and nearly always placed before,
nouns or pronouns so that the preposition with the noun or pronoun
forms a phrase equivalent to an adjective or adverb.

Examples

"Of"

is

Phrase equivalent to an adjective^

The king of Britain.

a preposition, and with the noun "Britain" it forms a phrase

Compare the expression "His Britannic

equivalent to an adjective.
Majesty.''

Phrases equivalent to an adverb

He

walked for six hours.

sat by the sea.

They

The phrases "for

six

hours" and "by the sea" are equivalent to

adverbs, for they qualify the verbs "walked"

In English

all

and

prepositions are followed by a

"sat."

noun

the accusative case, or "govern" an accusative case, as

sometimes.

or pronoun in
it is

expressed

still when they are

Most of the local and other relations which
are now expressed in Greek by a preposition followed by the Accusative,
Genitive, or Dative case of a noun or pronoun were originally expressed
by the use of a suitable case of the noun or pronoun alone.

Prepositions were originally adverbs, and are so

compounded with

verbs.

In the language from which Greek

when standing by

is derived there were cases which,

themselves, sufficed to denote local, temporal and

other relations.

The
The
The
The

accusative case denoted extension, or motion towards.

ablative case denoted separation, or motion from.
locative case denoted place where, or rest at.
instrumental case denoted the means by which an action was
accomplished, and it also had an idea of association.
In that form of the Greek language with which we are acquainted

PREPOSITIONS

155

we find the form which we call the Genitive case used to express the
meaning of the Ablative case as well as its own proper meaning.
The form which we call the Dative case expresses the meanings of
the Locative and Instrumental cases as well as its own.
are therefore justified in saying, as a practical rule, that the
Grenitive in Greek denotes motion from, and that the Dative denotes

We

rest at, and can also be used to express the instrument of an action,
although these are not the proper original meanings of these cases.

As we have

already stated the Accusative denotes motion towards.

These cases called in the help of adverbs to make their meaning more
precise, and, when these adverbs had become fixed in this use by custom,
they were treated as a separate part of speech, and called Prepositions.
Prepositions do not properly speaking "govern" the cases of the
nouns which they precede. The case is really the governing element in

the preposition only serves to

the expression

sense in which

it is

make

clear the exact

used.

But as language developed the prepositions mastered the

As

the horse in the fable called in the

man

to help

him

cases.

against the

and allowed him to get on his back, and then found that he himhad lost his liberty, so the cases called in the help of the prepositions,
and then found themselves weakened and finally destroyed.
In English, French, Italian, and to some extent in modern Greek the
cases have disappeared, wholly, or in part, and the prepositions do the
work which they once did. For example we say "of a man" where
the Greeks said avdpmnov and "to a man'' where the Greeks said
stag,
self

dvBpamto.

In the New Testament we can see this process going on. Prepositions
noun where the case alone sufficed in

are used with the case of a

Classical Greek.

For example the simple Dative was used in Classical Greek to

but in New Testament Greek ev with the

express the instrument

Dative

is

so used.

Example

Kvpte, L Trard^ofiev ev fia^atpa;

Lord, shall

we

strike with the

sword?

Lk.

xxii. 49.

In estimating the meaning of a prepositional phrase (i.e. a preposition

followed by a noun) the proper course to adopt is first to consider the
force of the case of the noun and then to add to this the root meaning
of the preposition. The combination of the two ideas will generally
explain the meaning of the phrase.

PREPOSITIONS

156

If the proper force of the case is kept in view

it will

explain

how

same preposition can have such wholly different meanings with

different cases.
The meaning of the case is really far more important
than the meaning of the preposition.
We may see the joint influence of the case of the noun and the root
meaning of the preposition best by considering some preposition that
the

is

used with

all

three cases.

For example napd means "beside."

When

it is

used with the Accusative

motion alongside

it

denotes motion to beside or

of.

used with the Genitive it denotes motion from beside.

used with the Dative it denotes rest beside and is
translated "near," or "with."

When
When

it is

it

is

Examples
Accusative.

irepnraT&v 8e irapa

TrjV

6a\a(T<rav

Ttjs

TaKiKaias eidev

8vo dde\<l)ovs.

And

walking along the side of the sea of Galilee he saw two brethren.
KOI epi^av airoiis irapa roiis woSas airov.
And they cast them at his feet.

Genitive.

iyivero avBptoTros (iTTfOTaX/ifi'oj Trapa 6eov.

There came into being a

man

sent from God.

do^av Trapa dvBpairav ov Xafi^avta.

I receive not glory

Dative.

from men.

einXa^opevos TraiSlov

eoTTjtrev

avTo Trap* eavTa,

Taking a child he placed him near him.

KQi nap' aiiT^ ijifivav Trjv rjp,epav

And

iK.eivJ)v.

they remained with him that day.

Prepositions connected with one case only

The

uses of the prepositions given in the following tables are those

which occur most frequently in New Testament Greek.

The use of Classical Greek is somewhat different.
The meaning printed in black type after each preposition may be
regarded as indicating the root meaning of the preposition
it also
generally indicates the meaning of the preposition when compoimded
with a verb etc. The student is advised to master these meanings
thoroughly by learning them by heart, and to pick up the derived
meanings in the course of his reading, remembering what has been
stated above as to the importance of the meaning of the case in deciding the meaning of a prepositional phrase.
;

PREPOSITIONS

157

Prepositions connected with the Accusative only.

avd

up.

fis

into.

(Frequent in composition with verbs, but rare

before a noun.)

Prepositions connected with the Genitive only.

avn

over against, instead

QTro

away from

of,

in return

for.

(from the exterior).

(from the interior).

out of
in front of, before of time or place.
Prepositions connected with the Dative only.
cK

irpo

in of time or place.
together with.

ev
a-iu

J^otes

on the above prepodtions

ava occurs in the English word analysis iivoKvais) a thorough

loosing or loosing up.

The

likeness between the prepositions avrl, airo, ix, irpo, iv

Latin prepositions ante, ab, ex, pro, in

They occur

in such English

over against, or as a rival

to,

is

and the

obvious.

words as "antipope'' a bishop set up

the Pope, "antipathy" a feeling against a

person or thing, "abstraction"

a,

taking away, "expulsion" a driving

out, "propulsion"' a driving forward, "intrusion"' a thrusting in.

(riv is

found in

many English words such as "sympathy,"" "symphony"

{avinraBiia, (rvnt^avla).

Prepositions connected with the Genitive and Accusative

bia

through.

Kwrd

down.

With the Ace. on account of, owing to.

With the Gen. through, throughout, by means of.
With Aco. down along, during, with regard to,
according

fiera

among.

vepl

around.

\nr4p

over.

in-d

under.

to.

With Gen. down from, down upon, against.

With Ace. after.
With Gen. with, among.
With Ace. about, around, of place or time.
With Gen. about, concerning, on account of.

With Ace. above, beyond.

With Gen. on behalf of, for the sake of, concerning,
With Ace. under.
With Gen. under the influence of, hence "by" of
the Agent after Passive verbs.

PREPOSITIONS

158

hta

Notes on the above prepositions

found in such words as "dialect" a language spoken through
a district, " diagram " etc.
found in "catastrophe" which means a turning upside down.
found in the word " metaphysics" that science which is above

is

Kara

is

Iiera

is

beyond the science of physics.

found in the words "metaphor," "metamorphosis," but
there it has the sense of change, of transference from one state

or

It is also

irepi

is

imip

is

to another, which it commonly has when compounded with

a verb etc. in Greek. "Metaphor" means the transference of
a word properly referring to one set of objects to another
" Metamorphosis '' means a change of form.
set of objects.
found in such words as "perimeter" the length of a thing all
round, "peripatetic" a man who walks about.
the same word as the Latin "super." It occurs in such

English words as "hypercritical," over

critical.

Prepositions connected with the Accusative,

Genitive, and Dative
ivl

upon.

irapa

beside.

npos

towards.

With Aco. upon (placed on), up to, as far as.

With Qen. on, in the presence of, in the time of.
With Dat. on, at, on account of, in addition to.
With Ace. to the side of, beside, beyond, contrary.
With Gen. from beside, from (of persons).
With Dat. near (generally of persons).
With Ace. towards, up to, in reference to, with
regard

to.

With Gen. from. (Very

With Dat. at, close to.

rare in N.T.)

Notes on the above prepositions

fVj

is

found in the words "epitaph" an inscription on a tomb,

"epigram" a writing on a given subject.

irapa

is

found in the word " parable" the placing of one thing beside
another for comparison.

Prepositions compounded with verbs etc.

In English certain words which are generally classed as prepositions

are joined with verbs and nouns to form compound words.

Examples

undertake, overtake, outbid,

overcoat, outrigger.

PREPOSITIONS

159

But very frequently these "prepositions" are written after the word
with which they go, and separately from it. In this case it is plain
that these so-called "prepositions" are really adverbs.

They went away.

Examples:

We

took over the business.

This coat is quite worn out.

In Greek the "prepositions" are generally joined to the words which

they qualify, and form compound words.
I

send away,

aTrotrreXXo).

I drive together, or

gather together, avvaya.

A synagogue (a gathering together),

An

assembly (a body of men called

Chosen

trvvayayrj.

out), ekkXtjo-io.

out, ekXektos.

In some cases two " prepositions" may be joined to one word

I pass by opposite to.
avTiTrapipxpfiai
Consider the force of the "prepositions" in the following com-

pound words:

KaTa^alva

go up.
away.
I go through.
I go into.
I go out of.
I come upon.
I go by the side of.
I go towards (especially of going towards people).
I go with.
I go in.
I go down.

avep^Ofiai

dnepxpiuu
SiepXOiim
el(T4p-xpp.aL

e^cpxa/iai
iiTip)(op.ai

napipxofxai
Trpocrfpxop.ai

(TVvpxop.ai

I go

irpo^alvd)

I,go before.

diTtXeyw

V7rpex<0

I have over, I excel.

speak against, I contradict.

I endure.

remain under,

aTTOKaXuTrro}

cover

irifTTp4^<a

I turn towards, I turn again, I return, I repent.

Notice also

away from,

surname.

7riKa\4ofiai

I call upon, I

wpoaKoKfOfUu

I call to myself, I

wpoirKVvea

I kiss

Trpocrev^o/iai

pray

my
to.

I uncover, I reveal.

hand

summon.

to, I

worship.

160

PREPOSITIONS

In all these examples of compound words the "prepositions" have

the same meanings which they have when they are used before the case
of a noun or pronoun.
Certain of them however have a somewhat extended or different
meaning when they are used to form compound words.
For example dvd in composition means not only "up" but also "over
again," "anew" (the Latin "re") and also "back," and "to and fro."
ava/SXeVo)

means not only "I look up" but

dvajTin-To)

"I receive my sight.''

means "I fall back," or "I recline."

lifTa in

also "I look anew," or

composition generally has the sense of change or alteration.

from one place to another, I remove, I depart.

change my mind, I repent.

jicTa^aiva

I pass

fieravoim

fierdvoLa

repentance.

irapd from its

meaning

of "beside" or "along" gets a further sense of

passing on one side and so of averting, neglecting,

transgressing.

by the side
away.
go by the side of,

I pass

vapepxofiai

of,

I avert

irapaKoim

I hear amiss, I disobey.

vno from

its

of,

I pass

I violate, I transgress.

wapaffaiva

napaiTeopm

by

from the side

I pass

entreaty, I beg

off,

I refuse, I excuse myself.

meaning "under" gets the sense of subjection or

in-

feriority.

vnaKoia

I listn to, I obey, I

viraKor)

obedience.

vnorda-a-ofioi

I order

Certain

submit

myself under, I submit

"prepositions" such

as

as fully accomplished.

Some such compound words

dnoKTeiva)

to.

Kord, o-w sometimes

meaning in composition and denote that the
the verb with which they are connected is to be regarded

practically lose their local

action of

to.

are

djrd,

Sid,

CONDITIONAL SENTENCES

161

The following compound verbs which differ greatly in meaning from

the simple verbs from which they are formed should be carefully
learnt.

dvayivatrKto

I read.

ajTOKpivoum

eirayyeXKofiai

jrapayyeWa
napaKoXia

answer (I give a decision from myself).

promise (I announce concerning myself).
command (I pass a message along a line).
caU to my side, I summon, I admonish,

I exhort, I

entreat, I comfort, I encourage.

withdraw myself,

virayco

vwapx^i-

He

is

I depart.

drive or

(I

draw under.)

(he begins below, he commences).

Notice also the derived nouns inayyekia a promise, irapayyeXia a

command,

6 TlapdKXrjTos the Advocate, or the Comforter.

APPENDIX

II

CONDITIONAL SENTENCES
Conditional Sentences are sentences which contain a subordinate

and a principal clause which states

the result of the fulfilment of this supposition.
The subordinate clause is called the protasis, and the principal
clause is called the apodosis.
clause which states a supposition

Example

If

you do

Here "If you do this"

is

this
is

you

will

become

rich.

the Protasis, and "you will become rich"

the Apodosis.

The
The

introduced by

Protasis

is

particle

ilv is

verb in the Protasis

ei

"if."

regularly joined to
is

el

in the Subjunctive

in the Protasis

mood:

ci

when the

combined with

liv

forras idv, ^v, av.

The negative of the

Protasis is p.fi and that of the Apodosis is oi.

Testament, however, oi is sometimes found in a Protasis,
especially when the verb is in the Indicative mood.
The construction of Conditional sentences varies according as the
time of the supposition is Past, Present, or Future.
Future suppositions and one class of Present and Past suppositions

In the

New

have already been treated

N.

of,

and

will

cause no

difficulty.

11

162

CONDITIONAL SENTENCES

Examples Supposition in Present or Past time implying nothing

as to the fulfilment of the condition. The Indicative mood is used in
the Protasis just as in English ; any part of the finite verb may stand
:

in the Apodosis.
If thou art the son of God,
vl6s

el

For
ei

if

yap

Tov Oeov,

Abraham was
'A^paa/i, i^

elire

justified

command

this stone...

ra \W(^ TOVTt^...
Lk. iv. 3.
by works, he hath whereof to glory,

epyav ibKamOr],

Bom.

ep^ei Kav)(riiia.

iv. 2.

Supposition in Future time. Either el with the Future Indicative

in the Protasis and the Future Indicative or some other form expressing
future time in the Apodosis, or eav with the Subjunctive in the Protasis

and the Future or some form expressing future time in the Apodosis.
The latter form is the more common. Note that in English we seldom
use the Future in the Protasis of such sentences as these, but the
Present, which has acquired a certain future sense.
If

we deny him, he

will

deny

us.

KOKelvos dpvrjaeTat

el dpvrjirofieda,

2 Tim.

fjfjids.

12,

ii,

If all shall be offended in thee, I never will be offended.

el

Trdvres (rKavhdKur6r]<rovTai ev

(rot,

eya ovSeTrore trKavSoKurBriaoiuu.

Mt. xxvi. 33.

thou wilt thou canst make

If

edv 60^7]! hvvairai

fie

All this will I give thee, if thou wilt

Tavrd aoi Trdvra

doxro),

me

clean.

Mk

KaBaplfrai.
fall

edv Tretrav Trpoa-Kvvrjarjs

fioi.

Mt.

must

If I

edv

Serj

fie

die with thee, I will never

avvairoBavelv

iroi,

oil

firj

<re

deny

iv. 9.

thee.

dirapvrfO'Ofi.ai.

Mk xiv.
It will

be noticed that in

But

some conditional sentences

was not fulfilled-

40.

i.

down and worship me.

31.

the sentences given above nothing is

implied as to the fulfilment or non-fulfilment of the condition stated in
the Protasis.
in

all

it is

distinctly implied that the

condition is not, or

Examples.
If

Present time

you were wise, you would not do

this.

Past time
If

you had been

wise,

you would not have done

this.

CONDITIONAL SENTENCES

163

In Greek such sentences as these have a construction which is so

from that which is found in English that it demands special

different

attention.

The form which such sentences take in English is no guide

whatever to the way in which they should be translated into
Greek.

The rules given below must be carefully mastered and

membered.

re-

When

the Protasis states a present or past supposition implying

is not or was not fulfilled, the secondary tenses
of the indicative are used both in the protasis and the apodosis.
The verb in the apodosis nearly always has the adverb av.

that the condition

The Imperfect denotes continued action.

The Aorist simple fact.
The time of the action is implied in the context rather than
expressed by the tense of the verb^.
Present time

Examples.
This man,

woman

if

he were a prophet, would know who and what the

is...

ovTOS

fi rjv

npo^rjTTjs, eyLvaxruev hv ris Koi TTOTOTr^

fj

yvvrj...

Lk.
If
thee,
1

vii. 39.

thou knewest the gift of God, and who it is that speaketh with
thou wouldst have asked him...
fjSfis Trjv Sopeav tov 6eov, koi tIs iariv 6 Xiyav a-oi,...<rv &v i/TTjcrar

Jn

avTov...

If ye believed
El

yap eirurTcvere

Past time For

the Lord of Glory.
:

yap

if

iv.

10.

Moses ye would beheve me.

Mojuo-ei,

iiriaTCveTe &v ijioL

Jn

V, 46.

they had known, they would not have crucified

eyvaa-av, oiic &v tov Kvpiov

.1

ri}!

Sdfijs iaravpaxrav.

Cor.

ii.

8.

The following are further examples of suppositions contrary to fact

or unfulfilled conditional sentences taken from the New Testament.
1

(But as a rough rule

it

may

be said that the Imperfect expresses an

unfulfilled condition in present time,

and the Aorist expresses an

unfulfilled

condition in past time.)

112

164

ACCENTUATION

1.

TOVTOv

17

0a(ri\eia

?jv

f]

Tots 'JovSaiois,

KoivavoX iv
<j)v\aKJJ 6

KOI

oil

2.

T&

ovk eariv ck tov Kotrfwv tovtov,

ififj,

oi

1 IjfieBa

t&v

vnjjpirai oi

waripav

iv rais rjiiipus tS>v

n-poipryrav.

3.

fl

Trarepa.

5.

el

4.

jffiei

el

hv KarehiKOireTe tovs dvainovs.

jifi

KOfrfigv

napahoBa

ovk av

r]p,S>v,

ijp,e6a

o oiKobeirnanis wola

rfyawari

yap eyv&Keere

tov

el eic

fjyavi^ovTo av tva

fie

tI eariv
6.

ovai

e\apr]Te hv

*EXos deKa

o'oi

Xopa^eiv,

Bri6<rai8dv, ori el iv Tvptf Kai Si8S>vi iyevovTO ai Svvdfieis ai yci/d-

ftevat iv v/uv,

waKai &v iv O'aKKa

&Se, OVK hv aireBavev 6 dSeXcjyos

hv

cfioi

ep)(eTai, fypfiyoprjafv hv.

vpos tov

6v(Tiav, ovk

croi

fj

atfian

KXfimjs

oTi iropfvopai

ovai

efirj

rj

fiaiTiXfia

fjdeiTe.

9.

el

xal o'lroda iieTev6i}<rav.

p.ov.

8.

ft ifie jjSeiTe,

rii0\oi ^Te ovk hv ei)(eTe dpapriav.

7.

10.

el

6 deos warTjp

vpatv ^v, Tiyarrare hv ipe, eyat yap ck tov Beov i^rjXdov Ka\ ^K<a.
avSpcDirois rjpeirKov,

Xpurrov SoSXos

ou<c

hv

Kvpie, el ^s

Kal tov waripa pov

11.

el eTt

fjprjv.

APPENDIX

III

ACCENTUATION
There are three accents in Greek, the Acute accent

',

the Grave

accent \ and the Circumflex accent *.

The Acute accent can stand on any of the last three syllables of a

word, the Circumflex accent can only stand on one of the last two
syllables of a word, the Grave accent can only stand on the last syllable
of a word.

A word with an Acute accent on the last syllable is said to be

oxytone or sharp toned, if the accent is on the last syllable but one
the word is said to be parozytone, if the accent is on the last syllable
but two the word is said to be proparoxytone.
A word with a Circumflex accent on the last syllable is said to be
perispomenon, if the accent is on the last syllable but one the word is
said to be properispomenon.
A word with a Grave accent on the last syllable is said to be
barjrtone or

The

flat

toned.

last syllable

but two cannot be accented unless the last syllable

is short.

If the last syllable but one contains a long vowel or a diphthong and

at the same time the last syllable

is short,

the last syllable but one

is

ACCENTUATION OF NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES

accented with a circumflex accent,

if it

has an accent at

all,

165

except in a

few special words.

A word which has an acute accent on the last syllable changes this
a grave accent unless it is the last word in a clause or sentence.
For purposes of accentuation final oi and at are reckoned as short
vowels except in the Optative mood.
to

Examples

avdpamoi,

vfja-oi

but

iroirjo-oi

(Opt. Mood).

Accentuation of Nouns and Adjectives

The

place of the accent on the Nominative singular

All other cases are accented on the

same

must be

syllable as the

Nom.

learnt.

sing, as

far as the length of the last syllable permits.

Examples

avdpiajros,

dvdpanov,

npayfia, 7rpdyp.aTos, jrpayp.a.Tmv.

Exceptions. (1) The Gen. and Dat. of Oxytone nouns of the

and 2nd declensions are circumflexed.

Examples

1st

dpxhj ^PXV^: "PXTIj "PX"^"! "PX^'^'

6f6s, 6cov, 6ea, 0fS>v, 6eois.

SiKr), SikSiv.

(2)

The Gen.

pi.

of all nouns of the 1st declension is circum-

flexed.

(3)

Most monosyllables of the 3rd declension accent the

and Dat. in both numbers.

last

syllable of the Gen.

Example

SXs, &\6s, &\i, aKav, i\a-l.

Accent of Verbs
Verbs throw back their accent as

far as the length of the last

syllable will permit.

Examples

Sov\eva>, SmiXevovai, 8oi\eve, eSou'Xfuoi/.

The accent

of a verb

compounded with a preposition can never

precede the augment.

Example

Trapelxov,

not Trdpeixov.

For the accentuation of contracted verbs see pages

Exceptions.

Example
(2)

(1)

23, 24.

Participles in inflection are accented as nouns.

^nvkevcov, neut. ^ov\evov, not /SouXfuoi/.

The

1st Aor. Inf. Act., the

2nd Aor.

Inf. Mid., Perf. Pass.

66

Inf.

ENCLITICS
and

and

Part,

Infinitives ending in vw, accent the last syllable

but

one.

Examples

/SovXcfo-ai, yevi<r6ai, \eXvor6ai, XeXu/ievos,

laravai, hibovai, \eKvKivai.

(3)

The 2nd Aor.

Act. Part,

and Participles of the 3rd declenaccented like Oxytone adjectives.

sion, except the 1st Aor. Part. Act., are

Examples

Xmayv, Xvdels, \f\vKac.

The 2nd Aor.

Inf. Act. ending in eiv and the 2nd sing. 2nd

Aor. Imperat. Mid. ending in ov have the circumflex accent on the last
(4)

syllable.

Examples

einelv,

ytvm.

Enclitics

An
as

word which loses its own accent and

were part of the preceding word.

Enclitic is a

if it

The

Enclitics

(1)

The

(2)

The

which principally occur in the N.T. are

is

pronounced

oblique cases of the Personal pronouns of the 1st and

2nd person singular /te, fiou, ^ot, crt, <rov, <roi.
:

TTorCj

TTOVf

Indefinite pronouns ns,

iro)Sy

and the Indefinite adverbs

etc.

The Pres. Ind. of tl/u I am, except the 2nd person singular.
(3)
The word before an Enclitic does not change a final Acute accent
to a Grave accent.
If the last syllable of the preceding

the Enclitic

is

Examples

word

is

accented the accent of

dropped.
(ro<l>6s

If the preceding

ns, KaXdr eori.

word has an Acute accent on the

last syllable

but

two, or a Circumflex accent on the last syllable but one, it receives an

Acute accent from the Enclitic on the last syllable as a second accent.

Examples

&vdpair6s ns, ovtos fori.

If the preceding
one,

it

word has an Acute accent on the

receives no second accent.

its accent,

last syllable but

monosyllabic Enclitic here drops

a dissyllabic Enclitic retains

Examples
Parts of

ei'/ii

Example

it.

Xoyos ru, Xdyot nves.

coming

after oi retain their accent.

ouk iarlv oStos ayaSbs avdpanos.

WORDS DIFFERING

IN ACCENT

OR BREATHING

167

Proclitics

Proclitic is a

word which has no

The most important are the

f I, iv,

and the words

Words
aWd

ti,

accent.

Articles

6,

rj,

oi, al,

the prepositions

as, oi.

differing in accent or breathing

e is , e k

APPENDIX IV
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
1.

PARTS OF SPEECH

Bt parts of speech we mean the various classes under vfhioh

words used in speaking and writing may be arranged.
The names of the parts of speech are as
Noun. Pronoun. Adjective.
Verb.

Adverb.

Preposition.

The

follows

all

Conjunction.

Article, definite

and

Interjection.

indefinite, is also

sometimes classed as a

separate part of speech.

A Noun is the name

Examples

of anything.

(Latin nomen, name.^

John, boy, sweetness.

A Pronoun is a word used instead of a noun. (Latin pro, for
nomen, name.)
Examples I, you, they, who, that.
An Adjective is a word joined to a noun to limit its application.
(Latin adjectvm,, a thing thrown to.)
:

Examples Good, many.

is a word by means of which we can make a statement,
ask a question, or give a command about some person or
:

Verb

thing.

(Latin varhum, a word, so called as being the principal

word in the sentence.)

Examples I run, we see.
Adverb is a word joined to a verb, adjective or other adverb
:

An

to qualify its meaning.

Examples Slowly, very, there.

Preposition is a word joined with, and generally placed before a
noun or its equivalent ', so that the preposition together with
the noun forms a phrase equivalent to an adverb or adjective.
:

(Latin praepositum, placed before.)

Examples At, with, by.

Conjunction is a word that joins together sentences, clauses or
:

words.

(Latin conjicngo, 1 join.)

Examples

And, but,
1

for.

See page 184.

ENGLISH GRAMMAR

169

An

Intekjection is a word thrown into a sentence to express a feeling

of the mind.
(Latin interjicio, I throw in.)
Examples Hallo, ha.
The Definite Article The and the Indefinite Article A are always
joined with nouns like adjectives.
:

2.

As

took

PARSING

intended for older students it has not been thought

necessary to adopt the method of deriving the reason for the names of
the different parts of speech from examples.
This is excellently done in a little book called How to tell the Parts
of Speech, by the Rev. E. A. Abbott, published by Seeley, which the
this

student

who

is

is

altogether unacquainted with this subject is advised

to get.

few rules and examples are however given which

may be

of

assistance in determining the parts of speech.

The first principle to be remembered is that no word should ever

be parsed without careful reference to the function which it performs
in the sentence where it occurs.
In English many words having exactly the same form must be
regarded as entirely different parts of speech, according to the place
which they occupy in the sentence, and must be translated by wholly
different words in Latin and Greek, according as their meaning varies.
For example the word that may be (1)
demonstrative Pronoun.
demonstrative Adjective. (3)
relative Pronoun.
Con(2)
(4)

junction'.
(1)

That

is

that I want.

the man.
(4)

He

(2)

Give

me

said that this

that book.

(3)

was the book.

This

(4)

is

the book

He came that

he might find the book.

Again, the word considering

may

be

(1)

verbal noun.

(2)

participle.
(1)

Considering

is

slow work.

(2)

He went away

considering the

matter.

Many words may be nouns

or verbs, according to the place which

they occupy in the sentence

>

Con8i<1er tho

said that that

tliut

meaning
that

man

of the word that in the following sentence,

said was false.

He

ENGLISH GRAMMAR

170

Some snch words are : Bite, fly, rose, scale and sign.
Other words may be adjectives or nouns, such as Base,
:

last, stout,

spring, kind.

Other words may be adjectives or verbs, such as: Lean, clean, blunt,
idle, free.

Keniembering then always to consider the word in connection with

the student should ask himself the following questions
before parsing a word. They will help him to find out what part of
speech it is.
its sentence,

Is

(1)

it

the

name of anything 1
Then it is a noun.

Can a noun which is mentioned or thought of before be

(2)
substituted for the word without altering the meaning of the sentence ?

Then

it is

a pronoun.

Does it answer any of the questions What kind? Howmanyl

How much! Which! Whose? In what order? with regard to some
noun 2
Then it is an adjective.
(3)

(4)

Does

it

make a statement, ask a

Then it is a verb.

(5)

Does

it

answer the questions How ? When ? Where ?

Then it is an adverb.

Note.

The words How?

question, or give a

When? and Where?

command

are themselves

adverbs.

Docs

it

phrase which

is

(6)

stand before a noun or its equivalent making with

equivalent to an adverb or adjective ?

Then

it is

it

a preposition.

(Another test of a preposition is that it is a word which is not a

verb but which can stand before him and them, but not before he or
they.)
(7)

Does

it

join sentences, clauses or words

Then

The words
The

man

or to his

went
left.

it is

a conjunction.

in the following sentence are parsed as an example.

down the street and did not turn to his righx hand-

guiokli/

ENGLISH GRAMMAR

THE

171

ENGLISH GRAMMAR

172

NOUNS

8.

There are four kinds of nouns

to

Proper Nouns. A Proper noun is the name appropriated

(1)
any particular person, place or thing (Latin propriut, belonging

to a person).

Examples: John, Mary, London, England.

(2)

Common Nouns. A Common noun

things of the same kind have in

to

common

is the name which all

(Latin communis, belonging

all).

Examples

Boy,

girl,

town, country.

Collective noun
Collective Nouns.
number of persons or things forming one body.
Examples : Committee, jury, army.
(3)

(4)

Abstract Nouns.

An

is

the

name

of

is the name of some

from the person or thing in

Abstract noun

quality, state, or action considered apart

which it is embodied (Latin absiractus, withdrawn).

Examples: Goodness, whiteness, purity, servitude,

running,

walking.

Number, Gender, Case

Number. Nouns are inflected or changed in form to show
whether they are singular or plural in number.
A noun in the Singular number is the name of a single person
or thing, unless it is a Colleotive noun (see above).
noun in the Plural number is the name of

more than one

person or thing.

Examples

Singular

Plural

Horse

horses

Man

men

Ox

oxen.

In English all names of men or male animals are in the

Masculine gender, all names of women or female animals are in
the Feminine gender, all names of things without life are in the
Neuter gender. Nouns used to denote pei-sons of either sex such as
parent, sovereign, are said to be of Common gender.
In Latin and Greek, although all names of men and male animals
are Masculine, and all names of women or female animals are Feminine,
names of things without life may be Masculine or Feminine in gender

Gender.

ENGLISH GRAMMAR

173

The gender of a noun is generally determined by

the ending of the Nominative Singular.
Case. Nearly all traces of case-endings have disappeared from
English nouns. The only surviving ending is that of the Possessive
ag well as Neuter.

or Genitive case which is formed by adding 's to the end of a

the singular and s' to the end of the noun in the Plural.

Nominative

Example

Possessive Singular

horse

Possessive Plural

horse's

4.

noun in

horses^

ADJECTIVES

In English, adjectives are never inflected, but have the same ending
whether they qualify singular or plural, masculine or feminine nouns.
In Latin and Greek they are inflected to show gender, number,

and

case.

6.

Verbs are of two kinds

VERBS

Transitive and Intransitive.

Transitive Verbs. Transitive verbs are so called because

they denote an action which necessarily affects or passes over to
some person or thing other than the subject of the verb (Latin
(a)

iransire, to

pass over).

Examples: I throw, I tahe. These statements are not complete;

we ask immediately. What do you throw or take? The name of
the person or thing affected by the action of the verb must be
supplied in order to make a complete sentence / throw a ball,
I take an apple. The name of the person or thing which is affected
by the action of the verb is called the direct object.
A transitive verb is one which must have a direct object expressed
in order to make a complete sentence.
Intransitive Verbs. Intransitive verbs are so called because they
denote an action which does not aftect or pass over to any person or

thing besides the subject of the verb.

Examples

I stand,

The sun

shines.

These sentences are comi)lete

statements in themselves.
(5)
its

A verb is said to be in the Active voice when

spoken of as acting or doing something (Latin ago, I act).

Active Voice.

subject

is

ENGLISH GRAMMAR

174

Passive Voice. A verb is said to be in the Passive voice whan

spoken of as suffering or being acted upon (Latin patior,

its subject is

I suffer).

Examples

Active, I love, I was hearing.

Passive, I am loved, I was being heard.

N.B. Only Transitive verbs can have a Passive voice.
There are certain verbs such as I fall, I dip, etc. which do not
speak of the subject as acting these are however regarded as Active
verbs because they are Intransitive.
;

(fl)
Deponent Verbs. In Latin and Greek there are many
verbs which are called Deponent verbs. These are verbs which have
the form of Passive verbs, but which are Active in meaning.
They are called Deponent because they have laid aside (Latin

depono) a passive sense and assumed an active.

Examples

patior, I suffer.

airoKplvojuu, I answer.

{d)
The English Passive voice of any verb is formed by using the
proper tenses of the verb to be with the Passive Participle (which
usually ends in ed) of the verb of which we desire to form the Passive
voice.

Present simple Active

Present simple Passive
Past simple Active

I love.
I

am loved.

I loved.

Past simple Passive

Future simple Active
Future simple Passive

was

loved.

I shall love.

I shall

be loved.

This formation must be carefully distinguished from the use of the

same Auxiliary verb to be with the Active PartxciMiB which forms
the Continuous Active tenses of the verb.
Present continuous Active
Past continuous Active
Future continuous Active

am

was

loving.

loving.

I shall be loving.

The student should be able to tell readily what voice, tense, and
person any English verb is in ; unless he can do this he cannot possibly
translate from another language with accuracy.
It is good practice to go through the tenses of an English verb, first
in the Active, and then in the Passive.

ENGLISH GRAMMAR
Auxiliary Verbs.

(e)

175

Auxiliary verbs are verbs which are used

as aids (Latin ausnlia) to enable other verbs to form moods

which cannot be expressed within the compass of one word.

Examples

shall

go.

would have

gone.

and

tenses,

shall have been

sent.

In English the use of these verbs is very common, no tense in the

Active Voice except the Past can be formed without them, and they are
used in every tense of the Passive voice.
In Latin and Greelc they are rarely used. The only verb used in
these languages as an auxiliary verb is the verb io he.

Impersonal Verbs. Impersonal verbs are verbs which are not

first and second persons, but only in the third.
Examples It rains, it snows.

used in the

The Copulative Verb, Verbs

The verb
(1)

to he

has two meanings

of Incomplete Predication.
:

It is used in the sense of to exist as in the sentence

Ood

is.

two nouns or noun equivalents which

(2)
denote the same person or thing when the person or thing denoted by
the one is said to be identical with the person or thing denoted by the
It is used to join together

other.

Examples
This

William was Duke of Normandy.

am

the governor.

is he.

As the nouns or noun equivalents joined together by the verb to be

denote the same person or thing, they must always be in the same
It is grammatically incorrect to say / am him. It is me, because
case.
and me are in the Accusative case, and / and it are in the

Mm

Nominative

case.

It is necessary to observe this rule very carefully in Latin and

Greek where the Nominative and Accusative cases generally have
different forms.

This rule

is

sometimes stated as follows

" The verb 'to be

'

takes the same case after

it

as before

it."

The verb to he may also join together a noun or a noun equivalent

and an adjective, making a sentence which asserts that the quality

ENGLISH GRAMMAR

176

denoted by the adjective is an attribute of the person or thing denoted

by the noun or noun equivalent. This adjective always agrees with
the noun in number, gender and case, in such languages as Latin

and Greek.
Examples

The king

is

proud.

He

is

good.

To

err is

human.

From its power of joining nouns to other nouns or adjectives the

verb to be is called the Copulative Verb. (Latin copulo, I link.)
It is also called a verb of Incomplete Predication because it does
not make sense when it stands by itself (except when used in the sense
of to exist), but requires to be followed by a noun or an ad|ective which
the Complement, becaiise it fills up the sense (Latin compleo,
Ifll up).
There are other verbs of Incomplete Predication besides the verb

is called

to be,

some Intransitive and some

Such verbs

are

Transitive.

Intransitive become, seem, appear,

Transitive

etc.

make, declare, choose, think, consider,

etc.

When

a verb of Incomplete Predication is Intransitive, or Transitive

voice, the Complement refers to the same person or
thing as the subject of the sentence, and must therefore be in the

and in the Passive

Nominative

case.

Examples

Peter became an Apostle.

This place seems healthy.
He is called our king.

But when a verb of Incomplete Predication is Transitive and in the

Active voice, the Complement refers to the same person or thing as
the object of the sentence, and is therefore in the Accusative case.
Examples

They made him

captain.

We choose you king.

You
This principle

(/)

is

consider

me

happy.

obviously of great importance in Greek and Latin.

Person and Number.

The First Person

of himself.

of the verb

is

used when the speaker

is

speaking

ENGLISH GRAMMAR
The Second Person

is

177

used when the speaker

is

speaking to

another person or thing.

The Third Person

is

used when the speaker

is

speaking of

love.

3rd person,

another person or thing.

Examples

He

2nd person, You.

1st person, I love.

loves.

The use of the Singular Number denotes that only one person

or

being spoken about.

The use of the Plural Number denotes that more than one person
or thing is being spoken about.
thing

in

is

Ride.

The verb agrees with

Note.

The

its subject in

Plural of the second person

You

Number and Person.

is

almost always used

modern English instead of the second person Singular, even where

only one person

is

being spoken

to.

But in Latin and Greek the Singular

person

is

being spoken

is

always used when one

to.

Tense. Tenses are forms which verbs assume to show at

{g)
what time the action of the verb is represented as taking place.

The times when the action may take place are

(iii)

(i)

Past,

(ii)

Present,

Future.

The tenses

in English have further subdivisions to

is

represented as being

show whether

continuous or in progress,
(2) indefinite or simple, (3) perfect or completed.
Below is a table of the Tenses of an English verb in the Indicative
Mood with the corresponding tenses of a Greek and Latin verb, given,
where possible, with the names by which the tenses are generally
the action

called in Latin

(1)

and Greek Grammars.

more tense-forms in English than

It will be seen that there are

in

Latin and Greek.

The Latin and Greek Present stands both for the English Present
Continuous and Present Simple, and the Latin and Greek Future for
the English Future Continuous and Future Simple.
The Latin Perfect has two meanings, one of which corresponds to
the English Past Simple, and the other to the English Present Perfect
or Perfect, as
N.

it is

generally called.

12

ENGLISH GRAMMAR

i78

TIME
STATE

ENGLISH GRAMMAR

179

The use

of tenses formed with may, might, should, would, etc. in

a most unreliable guide to the use of the Subjunctive and
Optative in Latin and Greek.

English

is

(i)
Participles are verbal adjectives resembling
Participles.
verbs in that they can have subjects and objects, tenses and voices,
and resembling adjectives in that they can qualify nouns.

There are two Participles in English the Active Participle ending

and the Passive Participle ending generally in ed or rf.
Examples: Loving, Loved.

in ing,

There is also a Past Active Participle formed with the auxiliary

having and the Passive Participle.

Example: Having

loved.

The Past Passive Participle is formed with the auxiliary verbs

having been and the Passive Participle.
Example

Having been

The Present

loved.

Participle Passive is being loved.

There is no Past Participle Active in Latin except in the case of

Deponent verbs, nor is there any Present Participle Passive. Both
however are found in Greek.
As the verbal noun or Gerund in English ends in ing as well as the
Active Participle care must be taken to distinguish them.
If the word is a Participle, it can always be replaced by such a
clause beginning with a Conjunction or a Relative.
When it is a verb-noun it cannot be replaced by a clause.

Examples (1) Skating is a fine exercise.

Here skating is a verb-noun and the subject of the sentence.
:

(2)

I like to see the boys skating.

Here skating can be replaced by the clause when

and is therefore a Participle.

they are skating,

There is a dancing bear.

Here dancing can be replaced by the Relative clause that
(3)

is

dancing.

a Participle.
Participles are also used with auxiliary verbs to form certain tenses
of the verb as shown above.
Therefore

it is

122

ENGLISH GRAMMAR

180

U) Verbal Nouns, Infinitive, Gerund. The so-called Infinitive

Mood to go, to see, to hear is really a verbal noun.
The other verlsal noun in English is called the Gerund, and ends in
ing

going, seeing, hearing.

Verbal nouns resemble verbs in that they can have a subject and
object, tenses and voices: they resemble a noun in that they
themselves can be the subject or object of another verb.

an

Examples of the use of the

As Subject To

(1)

Infinitive.

err is

Here

human.

the subject of

to err is

the sentence.

As

is

explained more fully in section 12, sentences in which the

a Subject are more usually expressed in the

Infinitive stands as

au anticipatory

following form' with

subject before the verb

It is

hvman

It is

a pleasure

it

standing as the grammatical

to err.

to see yojj.

It is advisable to

make

haste.

The object

of an Infinitive standing as the subject of a sentence

expressed aa in the following example
To forgive such crimes
difficult, or It is difficult to forgive such crimes.

may be
is

Here swh crimes is the object of to forgive.

The only way in which the subject of an Infinitive standing
subject of a sentence can be expressed in English
in front of it

clause

As

(2)

and making

It is difficult for

Object

it

is

as the

by inserting /or

depend on the predicate of the principal

a king

to forgive such crimes.

The^/ wish to live.

Here

to live is

the object of they

wish.

I wish him
him

to live is

to live.

Here

him, is the subject of to live

and the clause

the object oilwish.

I wish him

to see you.
Here him is the subject, and yow.the object
and the clause him to see you is the object oi I wish.
The use of the Gerund is seen in the following examples

of to see

As
As
(3)

Playing the violin a delightful occupation.

Object He loves playing the violin.

Subject

The

is

Infinitive is also used after certain

in an explanatory or epexegetic sense.

nouns and adjectives

ENGLISH GRAMMAR
Examples

181

I have not the heart to do it.

not worthy to gather up the crumbs under His table.
It is time to depart.
He was not able to answer a word.
:

We are

The Infinitive and the Gerund must be always treated as verbal

nouns, and then their use, in the various constructions in which they
occur, will explain itself.
Notes ou the form of the English Infinitive.

The English
always found with the preposition to in front of it.
This preposition is no part of the Infinitive, but is a relic of the
Dative case of the verbal noun in Old English. The force of the
preposition has become so weakened that its presence in the sentence
is generally quite neglected, and another preposition may even be put
in front of it, as for example
What went ye out for to see?
This Dative case of the verbal noun originally expressed purpose,
and this use still survives in such sentences as I came to see ymc, He
Infinitive is nearly

went to hear the hand.

The proposition
can, shall, hid,

let,

to

may

make,

be omitted after certain verbs such as may,

etc.

/ can do this, Let him go. Make him stay.

Contrast with these the following examples, I am able to do
Allow him to go, Force him to stay.
Examples

6.

sentence
or a question.

is

SENTENCES

a group of words expressing a statement, a command,

(Abbott.)

Every sentence must consist of at

(1)

this.

The Subject

least

two parts

the name of that which

is

spoken about*.

' The definition of the Subject of a sentenoe given above is not satisfactory.
In the sentence Caesar conquered the Gauls, the Gauls are spoken
about quite as much as Caesar.
It is however the definition generally given.
Dr Abbott suggests the following definition: " The Subject of a verb in a
stating sentence is the word, or collection of words answering the question

asked by putting

Who

or

What

before the verb."

ENGLISH GRAMMAR

182

The Predicate the word, or group of words which expresses

(2)
the assertion that is made, the command that is given, or the question
that is asked about the subject.
Predicate is not necessarily identical with the verb, it
and the objects, if any, as well as

The

N.B.

includes the extensions of the verb

the verb.
If the verb in the Predicate is Transitive it

must have an

Object.

object of a verb is the name of that towards which the action of

the verb is directed.
In considering a sentence, first pick out the verb.
The best way to find the Subject is to ask the question who ? or

The

what

the verb.

? before

The
what?

best

way

to find the Object

is

to ask the question

whom ?

or

after the verb.

Example

Caesar conquered the Gauls.

Therefore Caesar is the Subject.
Caesar conquered whom ? answer the Gauls. Therefore the Qauls is
:

Wh,o conquered? answer Caesar.

the Object.

Either the Subject or the Predicate can be omitted when it can

be supplied from the context. It is therefore possible for a
sentence to consist of only one word.
easily

Examples

Go.

Come.

Who
The omission

(Subject omitted.)

did this

I.

(Predicate omitted.)

Latin and Greek

because the forms of the verbs in these languages leave no doubt as to
the number and person of the subject. It only occurs in EngUsh in
the Imperative mood. When any part of the sentence is omitted it is
of the Subject often occurs in

sometimes said to be understood.

Eveiy sentence must

(1)

into one of five forms

Subject and Intransitive Verb.

Example

(2)

fall

Subject
The sun

Predicate
shines.

Subject, Transitive Verb, Object,

Example

Sdbjbct
Caesar

Pbbdicatb

Verb

Object

conquered

the Qauls.

ENGLISH GRAMMAR
(3)

Subject, Transitive Verb,

Example

Socrates
(4)

Verb

Indirect Object

taught

Plato

Subject, Copulative

Subject

Objects,

Predicate
Direct Object
phUosophy.

Verb or Intransitive Verb of Incom-

plete Predication, Predicate

Bxamijle

two

Subject

183

Noun

or Adjective.

ENGLISH GRAMMAR

184

EQUIVALENTS

7.

and the Adverb may be replaced by other

do the same work in the sentence.
A word doing the work of a different part of speech, or a, group
of words doing the work of a single part of speech, is called an

The Noun, the

Adjective,

parts of speech which can

eoiuivalent.

A group

of words forming

an equivalent, and not having a subject

or predicate of its own, is called a phrase.

Roman

In the above example the words the great

general, in-

habitants of modern France and at the siege of Alesia are all Phrases.
group of words forming au equivalent and having a subject and

predicate of its

own

is called

a subordinate clause.

Example: Caesar, who was a great Roman general, completely

conquered the Gauls, who inhabited modern France, when he took
Alesia. Here all the groups of words in italics are Subordinate Clauses.

NoPN Equivalents. A noun

(1)
(2)
is

equivalent

may be

A pronoun. You are happy. / am miserable.

A verb-noun, an Infinitive or Gerund. I like to run.

Sleeping

pleasant.
(3)

An

adjective.

Both vnse
(4)

axiA foolish

know

this.

A clause, generally called a noun or substantival clause.

That you have wronged me doth appear in
you know him.

this.

I see that

Adjective Equivalents.
(1)

An

adjective equivalent

may be

A verbal adjective or participle, or a participial phrase.

A loving mother. A loved spot. We saw a man carrying wood.

(2)

A noun in apposition.

(3)

A noun preceded by a preposition,

Qmen

Victoria.

Edward

the peacemaker.

or in the possessive case.

The Houses of Parliament,

Maid^ Causeway.
The King of Britain. (Compare His Britannic Majesty.)
Dogs /or hunting.

ENGLISH GRAMMAR
(4)

An

185

Adjectival Clause.

The horse which I saw is there. At evening when the sun did set.

An

Apveeb Eqpivalbnts.
(1)

A noun preceded

by a

adverb equivalent

may

be

preposition.

He lives in the woods.

He walked for six Iwurs.
(2)

noun sometimes

qualified

by an

adjective, but without a

preposition.

He died

last night.

They went home.

We hope to live many years.

(3)

An

Adverbial clause.
I will see

you when you come.

have come

I will see

m ordar to see him.

you

if you com^.

A participle or a participial phrase.

We stood amazed.

(4)

Hearing this I went home.

The sum hamng set we went to

An

(5)

We came
He

8.

A simple
and a

rest.

Infinitive.

is

to see the spectacle.

too foolish to be trusted.

SENTENCES SIMPLE AND COMPLEX

sentence

is

a sentence which contains a single subject

single predicate.

complex sentence is a sentence which contains a principal

more subordinate clauses depending on it, or on one

clause and one or

another, as noun, adjective or adverb equivalents.

It will be found convenient to keep the name sentence for complete
statements occurring between two full stops.
Groups of words forming part of a compound or complex sentence,
and having a subject and predicate of their own, should be called

clauses.

ENGLISH GRAMMAR

186

Groups of words forming aii equivalent to some part of speech, and

not having a subject and predicate of their own, should be called
phrases.

Two or more clauses which are not dependent on one another, but
which make equally important and independent statements, are said
to be combined by coordination, and to form a compound sentence.
Such clauses are generally joined together by the coordinating conjunctions and, but,

E:cample

or, for, etc.

You do

this,

and I do

that.

Example of a Complex Sentence.

When the

captain drew near to the coast, he sent some of his men

to land in order that he might get help, if the other ships, which had
not yet arrived, should need it.
(1)

Main Clause

Subject
(2)

when
is

He.

he sent some of hit

Predicate

the captain

drew

men

to

Sent some of his

land.

men

to land.

iiear to the coast

an Adverbial Clause qiialifying

when he sent the men.

sent.

It tells us
(3)

in order that he might get help

is an Adverbial Clause qualifying sent.
It tells us

(4)

why he

sent the men.

if the other ships should need it

is

an Adverbial Clause qualifying get help.

what conditions he would need the help.

It tells us under
(5)

which had not yet arrived

is an Adjectival Clause qualifying ships.
It tells us more about the ships.

9.

SUBSTANTIVAL OB NOUN CLAUSES

Noun Clause is a clause which stands in the
noun to the principal clause or to some other clause in

Substantival or

relationship of a

a complex sentence.
(1)
(3)

lie

As Subject. That he is coming is certain.

As Object. He said that he was king. (Statement.)
commanded thfit bread should be set before them. (Command.)

ENGLISH GRAMMAR

187

He besought him that he might be with him.

Do you know who he is ?
He asked how it happened. \ (Questions.)
Tell me wliere he lives.
J
You see how unjust he is. (Exclamation.)

(Petition.)

"|

(3)

As Complement,

My
(4)

Noun.

or Predicative

hope-is that

you may

succeed.

In Apposition to another noun.

I had no idea that you would oppose me.

When

Noun

Clause which

is

generally called a

is

generally called a

When

Noun

the object of a verb states a

is

fact, it

Dependent Statement.

Clause gives the words of a

command

or petition, it

Dependent Command or Petition.

When a Noun Clause begins with an interrogative or exclamatory

word such as who, what, where, whether, if, how, it is generally called a
Dependent Question or Exclamation.
All the Noun Clauses given above with the exception of the
Dependent Questions and Exclamations are introduced by the conjunction that and contain a finite verb.
In certain oases however an infinitive or a gerund may be used in
Noun Glauses instead of a clause introduced by tliat and containing
a finite verb. This is natural because the infinitive and gerund are
verbal nouns.

The

infinitive is

Noun
how far

used frequently in

Latin, it is therefore important to see

Clauses in Greek and

the same construction

prevails in English.
It is
(1)

used in English as follows

As

Subject.

To

err is

It is
(2)

As

Object.

human.

a pleasure

I declare

him

to see

you.

to he guilty.

We believe him
As Complement

to

go away.

(Command.)

or Predicative Noun.

My hope is

to succeed.

of the infinitive in a dependent statement is only found

a few verbs in English, such as / declare, I assert, I proclaim.

The use
after

\ (Statements.)

to he innocent, j

He commanded them
(3)

(See section 12.)

ENGLISH GRAMMAR

188

clause introduced by that is by far the most common

etc.
expressing
a dependent statement in English, and can be used
of

I believe,
way

any verb.
The infinitive is frequently used in dependent commands or petitions
English, and indeed is the most usual way of expressing them.
There are certain verbs such as I wish, I hope, I am able, I can, etc.

after

in

which always take an Infinitive as their object.

These are sometimes called Modal Verbs because they are considered to add to the verb new ways of expressing its meaning.

Examples

wish

to see the king.

We hope to live many years.

They can do nothing without you.
The use of the Gerund
Subject
Object

Healing

is

seen in such sentences as

the sick is

deny vsing

10.

(See 5/.)

a noble work.

the expression.

ADJECTIVAL CLAUSES

Adjectival clauses are introduced by the relative pronouns Who,

That, and their equivalents when, where, such as, etc. and
qualify some noun in another clause just like an adjective.
Which,

This
This

is
is

the
the

man who sent me.

man whom I saw.

We will do this in the evening when we meet.

This is the place where I was horn.
I can sell you a house such as yov, require.

The word to which the relative pronoun refers, and which the clause
which it introduces qualifies, is called the antecedent.
In the first two sentences the word the man is the antecedent, in
the others evening, place, and house.
A Participle qualifying the Antecedent may take the place of an
Adjectival Clause.

We may write
I
I

saw a man clinging to a mast, or

saw a man who was clinging to a mast.

ENGLISH GRAMMAR
11.

189

ADVERBIAL CLAUSES

Adverbial Clauses are clauses which stand in the relationship of

an adverb to the verb in another clause.

Example

I will

do this on condition that you do

that.

Here the clause on condition that you do that qualifies the verb
/ will do just like an adverb.
The sentence might have been written I will do this conditionally.
:

Example

wUl do

this

when to-morrow

comes.

Here when to-morrow comes is an adverbial clause qualifying I will do.

The sentence might have been written I will do this to-morrow.
:

Adverbial clauses

may

be divided into eight

classes.

(1)

Final Clauses denoting purpose.

(2)

Temporal Clauses denoting time when.

(3)

Local Clauses denoting place where.

(4)

Causal Clauses denoting cause.

(5)

Consecutive Clauses denoting consequence.

(0)

Conditional Clauses denoting supposition.

(7)

Concessive or Adversative Clauses denoting contrast.

(8)

Comparative Clauses denoting comparison.

Examples of Adverbial Clauses

(1)
(2)
(3)

(4)
(5)
(6)

(7)
(8)

He ran thai he might get home soon.

He ran when he got on the road.
He ran where the road was level.
He ran because he was late.
He ran so that he got home soon.
He ran if he was late.
He ran although he was early.
He ran as he was accustomed to do.

The names given to the various kinds of Adverbial Clauses in the

above list are names commonly given to them in Grammars. They
are given here for that reason, and not because they have anything

ENGLISH GRAMMAR

190

recommend them in themselves. Some of the names are pedantic

and obscure, and it is much better to speak of the clauses of classes
Consequence,
1, 2, 3, 5, as clauses denoting Purpose, Time, Place, and

to

respectively.

may be used to express some kinds of Adverbial

Care is often needed to distinguish such participles from
those which take the place of Adjectival Clauses (see 10 above).
If the participle can be resolved into a clause consisting of a
conjunction and a finite verb it is used in place of an Adverbial Clause,
but if it can be resolved into a clause introduced by a relative pronoun
Participle

Clauses.

it is

used in place of an Adjectival Clause.

Example (1) Knowing this, I returned home.

Here knowing this obviously means since I knew
:

this

and

is therefore

an adverbial clause denoting cause.

saw a man clinging to a spar half a mile from shore.

a spar might be replaced by who was clinging to a
spar. This is a clause introduced by a relative pronoun and clinging
to a spa/r must therefore be described as an adjectival clause.

Example (2)
Here clinging

Example

Seeing the

(3)

to

man

running away, I went after him.

This might be equally well expressed as follows

Since I saw the man who was running away, I went after him.
When the sentence is put in this form there is no difficulty in analysing
it.

Even Eelative Clauses

are sometimes adverbial

if

they express

cause or purpose.

Example
in pvmishing

and

is

(1).
its.

We disliked our master who seemed to

Here who seemed

is

take

pleasure

equivalent to hecarise he seemed,

an adverbial clause of cause.

Example (2). They sent. men who should spy out the land.
Here who should spy out the land is equivalent to in order to spy out
the land, and is an adverbial clause of purpose.
In analysing complex sentences pay very little heed to the foem,
but be sure to find out what the meaning of the clauses is by putting
them into other words if necessary.

ENGLISH GEAMMAK

191

PREPARATORY IT AND THERE

12.

This construction
mention.

is

so

common

in English that

it

seems to require

.special

The

is nearly always put before the verb in English

indeed,
nouns have no case endings to distinguish the subject from
the object, the order of words in a sentence is the only way in which
the subject can be distinguished from the object.
But in certain cases, especially where the subject of the sentence is
in the infinitive mood, the subject is placed after the verb.
Then the pronoun it is placed before the verb to act as a preparatory
subject and to show that the real subject is comiug.

subject

as English

It is good to walk in the way of righteousness.

Here the real subject is to walk in the way of rigkteousness, and
is good is the predicate.
It is the preparatory subject, or the grammatical subject as it is
sometimes called.
The adverb there is used in the same way especially when the verb

Example

in the sentence is part of the verb to he.

There was once a boy who lived on an island.

In this sentence the subject is a hoy. There should be parsed as a

Example

preparatory adverb.

Neither of these constructions exist in Latin or Greek.

The Latin or Greek for the examples given above are as follows

Bonum
KoKov

e'oTi

Olim

est

ambulare in via justitiae.

rfj oSa Trjs SiKaioaivrjS.

Ttepiwarfiv ev
fuit

puer qui insulam habitabat.

^v wore

Trail bs Karu/cci vijaov.

ENGLISH-GEEEK VOCABULAKY
The numbers refer
I abide,
I

n4va

am

14

11

I
21
above, iwep with Ace. 21
according to, koto foil, by Ace.
Acheldama, 'Axe\Saiidx 26

bad, KaK^s

afraid, <l)o^4ofiai

after, jierd

8
baptism, ^ajmiT/ia 17
Baptist, 'BartTurrfjs 6
I bear, (^cp&i 8
I bear witness, p.apTvpia 2
beautiful, xaXos 11
I become, -y/i/o/xai 21
bed, kXiVij 15
before (preposition), irpo 6
TTiov 28
efiirpoadev 29
26
I baptise, jSoTrrifeo

20

19
with Ace. 9 ; oirla-a 15
age, aliiv 16
all, Ttas 18
all things, Travra 15
I allow, ida> 22; ai^ii/^t 30
always, irdvTOTe 30
Ananias, 'Avavlas 19
and, Kai 3 8e 6
Andrew, 'AvSpcas 19
angel, ayyeXos 3
Ajinas, 'Avyas 20
I announce, dirayyeKka 15
I answer, anoKpivofiai 10
answer, airoRpuris 20
I am anxious, fifpiiivda 25
I am anxious beforehand, npojupip-vdo) 27
Apostle, ajrdoToXos 9
I appoint, Kadiarrifii, 29
I approach, irapayivopm 19
I argue, arvv^rjTea 26
I arise, dviaraiiai 29
as, KoS&s 23
as much as, So-oi 20
I ask, aiT-cQ) 2
eTrtI ask a question, iparrda 22
pardta 31
assembly, eicKXijo-ia 5
I am astonished, e'/cn-Xijo-o-o/jai 20
daixfi4op,ai 26
I

Vocabularies

I ate, (j)ayov

am able, Sivafuu
am about, fieXKa

to the

I beg, heopAu 11
I begin, apxc/juu

;
;

fV<B-

TrpiV

beginning, dp^T 5
on behalf of, iirep with Gen. 21
I behold, 6ea>p4(o 2
behold! ISoi 21
I beUeve, n-urreie> 1
beloved, dyairrjros 7
I benefit, eS iroUa>

I beseech, dc'o/^ai
beside, irapd 15

Bethlehem,

24
11

BijdXce/i

15

I betray, n-apafit'Sia/u 27
I bid, keXcuo) 11
I bless, evKoyiio 12 ; KareuXayea>

28
blind, 1-0^X6! 11
blood, alfia 17
boat, TrXoIov 4

body, o-mjua 18
book, jSt^Xiov 4
I

am

iDorn, ycvi>aa>

bread, Spros 3

22

ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY
condemnation,

28

I break, K\aa>

means

of,

Caesar, Kaia-ap 27
Caesarea, Kaia-apela

I crucify, o-raupdo)
I cry, /Sddo)

22

22
8

I cry aloud, xpafto

cup, n-oTrjpwv 15

26

14

cut down, exKOTTTca

a debt,

d<^f iXij^a

28

debtor,

d(/)fiXeV7jr

I cast out,

eK^dXXto 8

I defile, Koivdo)

30
30
23

I delay, (he'XXcd

21

21

piirrto

29
a certain man, ns 20
Trais 16
child, TcKvov 4
child, young, iratSiov 4
I choose, K\4yopai 21
I cease, iravop^i

church, ekkXi/o-io
city, irdXis 17

KaBapi^a 13
clothe myself, nepi^aWofiai 25

I cleanse,
I

cloud, vf^eXj]
cock, akfKTiap

evroXri

29
condemn, KaraKpiva 15
compare,
N.

ofioido)

dnepxapm 10

avax(opea 20
departure, e^oSos 22
desert, fprip.os 3
I desire, evidvpia
I destroy, (^Beipa

devil,

come, fpxopxu, iropevofim 10

I come upon, eirep^oiiai 20
to come to pass, yiveadai 21
I OO&mand, xeXevci)
11
napayyeXXffl
11 ; eWeXXo) 29
I

commandment,

I depart, VTrdyco 8

KOT-aXijo)

20
15

djroXXuti)

25

destruction, djrmXeja 31

16

I comfort, irapaKoKito

demon, Sai/;tdi'wi/ 4
deny, apveopm 10

24

20

13

darkness, o-Kdros 18
daughter, dvydrrip 17
David, Aauei'S, Aa^i'S 18
day, fifiepa 5
dead, vcKpos 18
deaf, Koxjios 17
death, ^dvaros 3

oast, ^o\ti

I cast, |3aXX<B

30

crowd, o;(Xos 9

Caiaphas, Kmdipas 20
(jjavea 16
I call, KoXfo) 2
npoaI call upon, iviKoKiofiai 21
KoKeo} 31
I came, ^\6ov 14
fiaoTa^a) 13
I carry, 0epo) 8
I carry to, elat^ipat 28
I carried, ijveyKov

11

Cornelius, Ko/jv^Xior 15
couch, kXivij 15
council, avvehpiov 20
I am of good courage, Bapa-ea
cross, (TTavpos 15
1 crow, (fxavcai 16

with Gen. 9

8td

18

Kpi/ia

I confess, ojuoXoyem
I continue, pevto 1

bridegroom, vv\i^los 16
I bring, tiya 8
I bring forth, tIktoi 14
I bring in, cltraym 23
brother, abeK<\)6s 3
I build, oiKoSo/ieo) 10
I burn, Kaio> 28
but, aK\a, 84 6
I buy, dyopdfo) 13
by, vno 9
by-

193

fiai/ttdi/iof

fiidjSoXor

11

I die, dnodvricrKa 1
diflerent, erepos 7
disciple, padrjTrjs 6

I discuss, irui'fi)To) 26
^OpLQL 31
disperse, Siao-n-et'pffl 18
I disregard, dBerea 24
I divide, pepl^a 29

StaXoyi-

13

ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY

194

division, irxia-iia 21
I do, TTOieo) 2 ; irpairiTa

'

13

dog, KVtOV 17
door, 6vpa 16
down, Kara, foil, by Gen. 20
I drag, <rvpa 26 ; cXkvo) 29
I draw away, airoirnia 26
I draw near, eyyi^a 13
I drink, ttiVoi 14
I drive, Sya 8
I drive away, aTrdya 13
I drive together, avvdya 8
dry, lijpor 29
dumb, Kacjios 17

dwell

in, Karoifceiu

12

ear, o^r 17
earth, y^ 5

I eat, ia-Sica 1
I eat with, a-weadia 26
Egypt, AtyuiTTOj 15
elder, Trpetr/SuTepos 9
Elijah, 'HXci'aj 19
I endure, wpoa-KapTepdco 20
enemy, ex^pAs 12
I enter, clvipxojxai 19
I err, n-Xavoo/iai 30
I escape, iK<^evya 26
I establish, KaSlarijiu 29
eternal, aiuviof 7

even

as, xadcof

every, iras

23

favour, x^P'^ 16
field, dypds 10; x*"/"'""
fill,

7r\t]p6a>

I find, evpiiTKtt)
fire,

TTup

17

vparos 7
ix^us 17
fitting, npiiTov 30
first,

fish,

thousand, TrerTaKtirxiXioi 19
14
flesh, <rdp^ 16
I follow, oKoKovdia 30
food, rpo^T] 21
foolish, a.<f)pfav 18
foot, TToOff 17
for (conj.), ydp 6
for (prep.), irpo 6
five

I flee, (jjevya

I forgive, a<f>ir]pi 30
forgiveness, atjjecrK 17
forty, T(Taapd<ovTa
free, i\ev6cpos

19

11

from, oTrd 6
fruit,

KapTos 9
22

fulfil, irXripoa)

Galilee, raXiXam 19
garment, ipdriov 4 ; x^rd)i' 16
I gather together, eVio-vi'd'yai 31

generation, yevor 17
Gentiles, to e^i/t) 18
I give, 8iSa>iii 27
I give back, dnoSiSaiu

18

27

22

everywhere, n-ai/ToxoB 29
the Evil One, 6 wovtipos 7
I exalt, v\fro<u 22
I exhort, irapaKoKia 2
eye, 6(j>daKp,6s 9

I give up, napabibap.1

I glorify, So^dCio 8
glory, Sd^a 6

npoaaiTov 4
faith, TTitms 18

27
27

I go, epxop,ai, wopevo/iai 10; /Saivca 14

1 go about, bUpxojiai 10

go away, dTrtpx"/'"" 10
go into, flarepxofiai 19 eio-iropfvop,ai 28
I go out, f^fpxoiiai 19
fRiropevopw. 26
I go through, SUpxopm 10
I go towards, npoaripxop^i 20
God, fltds 3
gold, xpva-os 26
I

face,

faithful, iruTTos

I fall, ttiVto)
false, ^JAevSrjs

14
29

I fast, vfiarcva 31
father, n-arfip 17
fault, irapanrafjux

30

ENGLISH-GEEEK VOCABULARY
good, dya$6s 7; KoXos 11
Gospel, evayyeXtov 4
Gospel, I preach the, euayyeXi'fo/iai

10

^^
18

grace, x"P'*
great, /iiyas

195

if. El'
18
image, V<bi/ 16
immediately, evOvs 9 evBias 30
impossible, dSwoT-of 15
;

in,

e'l/

inhabit, KarotKcta 12
I injure, dSiKea 12

a Greek, 'EUi/k 23
I guard, (fivKdorira 13
guard, <j>vKa 16

injustice, dStKi'a 10
I inquire, irvuSdvofuu
into, els 6

I invoke, imiidK4op,ai

hair, dpi^

Israel, 'lo-paijX

had, eo-xov 14
17
hand, x"'p 17
hated, ixBpos 12
I have, ?x<" 1
I have mercy on, iKeka 12
he, she, it, avros, airfi, avTo
head, K60aX^ 5
heal, Bepaireitt)

11

lao^ai

healthy, iyi^s 18
I hear, aKova 1
heart, Kopbia 5
heaven, oipavos 9
heavenly, oupavios 30
I give heed to, npoa-exio

22

26

14
here, SSe 11
ivedSe 25
Herod, 'H/jmSi/s 15
I hide, KpvTTTa 13
high-priest, dpxifpfvs 18
hill, Spos 18
himself etc., avrdr 8
I held, ea-xov

I hold, Kparittt

holy, ayios

honour, rt/i^ 28
I hope, ikiri^tt) 13
hope, ikiris 16
hour, fipa 5
house, o'koj 3; olnia 11
householder, oiKoSeo-irori/s 9
how, n-air 19

humble, Ta7reiio< 22
husband, dvifp 17
I

I, eyo)

11

21

10

James, 'idna^os 26
Jerusalem, 'If po(rd\u/ia, 'lepov(r(xKr}fi
9
Jesus, 'Iijo-oSs 8
Jew, 'lovbaios 8
John, 'Imdvi;; 8
Joppa, 'loTTTT?; 20
Jordan, 'lopSavr/s 11
Joseph, 'la>a-fi<j) 15
journey, I make a, iropeio/iai 10
joy, yapd 5
I judge, Kpiva. 1

g'udge, KpiTTis

judgement,
just, hlKOlOS

18

Kpip.a

Kp'uris

18

I justify, SiKaidra 22
I

keep

safe, njpeo)

I kill, aTTOKTEll/O)
I kindle, Kai'm 28
king, ;3a(riXeuf 17

20

hypocrite, vreonpiri]!

22

kingdom,

iSao-iXfia

knee, ydvu 17
I

know,

14 ; iiriyivafTKa

yivaxTKO)

23; o'Sa 30

known, yvairros 26
I labour, noind^w 20
labourer, epydTqs 9

lake, ddXa<r(ra 6
lamb, d/iuos 14
lamp, Xa/;t7rdr 16

land, y5

\vxyos 29

ENGLISH-GBEEK VOCABULARY

196

language, yXSo-o-a 6
last, fo-xoTos

law,

vofios.

ua-Tepos

29

it is lawful, eleo-Tt 11
lawlessness, dvo/ila 26
I lay down, rWij/ii 28
I lay hold of, KaToiKan^dva
,

21

ewiKafi^dua 29
I lay upon, 7r(|3aXX(a 21
Lazarus, Adfapor 23
I lead, ^ya> 8
I lead in, fl<rdya> 23
leader, rjyejiitv 16
I learn, jiavBavfo 14
learner, liaBrfrf)! 6
I leave, KaToKeiira 14
leper, Xfjrpdj 13
I let alone, a^i'jjp
I

let go,

letter,

30

like, oiiows

make

name,

17

life, fa>i7

26
multitude, o;(Xos 9
I must, see necessary
mystery, p-vo-TTipiov 27
I multiply, irXrjdvva

ypdnna 17

light, (^ms

little,

26

like, ojuotdo)

fuKpos

look

29

21

20

20

net, S/Kruov

at,

Lydda, AvSSo 20

new

veos 21 ; KOti/ds
night,
t, vv
vii 16
',

make
make

manifest, (^avtpom 22
ready, ^Tot/ndfw 13
man, axflpwtros 3; dv^p 17
young man, veavias 6
I manifest, (jiaivm 15
<j}avep6a 22
;

28

no more, /xijkeVi 18
no one, /;8y, ouSf is
not, oi

6;

0,

10

/i^

nourishment,
now, i/Cw 21

Magdalene, MaySaX?;!']} 23
maiden, napBivos 3
I make, irqUio 2
I

o-Tti'dy

nation, yci/oj 17
near, e'yyiJs 20
necessary, it is, 8ei

11
neighbour, 6 nXria-iov 26

/SXfVm 1
I loose, Xuo) 9
lord, Kvpios 3
I love, (j)i\i<M) 2 oyaTraoi 22
love, dyaTTTj 5

ovop,a 18

narrow,

I live, fao) 22
loaves, aproL 3
I

Moses, MmiJcr^s 19
mother, fiijrijp 17
mountain, opos 18
mouth, cTTopa 18
much, TToXur 18

30

aijtlrjju

Mary, Mapid/i, Mapia 15

master, Scarrorrjs 6 ejruTTdrtjs
meat, rpncjiri 21
mercy, I have, f'Xcco) 12
middle, /jua-ot 29
minister, Siukovos 12
miracle, a-rj^eiov 4 ripas 17
money, dpyipiov 4 ; ra p^/jij/iara
month, ftiji/ 16
more, //taXXoi' 18

rpoc^ij

a 14

I obey, vwaKoiai 11
I observe, tij/je'cb 2
I offend, o-icai/SaXifa)
old, TToXatdr

on, Ejri

13

21

20

on account

of, Sid

with ace. 9

many,

one,

many

one another, dXXijXour 31

one's own, i8toi 7
I open, dvolya 12

n-oXus 18
things, ttoXXo 14
market, place, dyopd 28
marriage, ydjiog 11

fls, uia,

iv

18

ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY
I put upon,

other, eVfpos

I ought, o0ciXa)

out

of, ex,

parable, napa^oKr)

15

napa-

\e\vfifvos 28
pareuts, oi yovels

ri'67;/ai

15

26

28

I place beside, napaTiSrjiu

place, TOTTOf

28

poor, 7rT<ox6s 11
possible, SuvaTos

15
?ower, i^ovaia 5 ; Siva/us 20
praise, cuXoyem 12
I pray, Trpoo-cuxoF"' ^^
I preach, Kr)pi<T<ra> 8
I preach the Gospel, evayyeXi^ofiai
10
I present, naplimifu 29
I am present, rrapayivoiiai, 19
priest, tf/jEiJs 18
prison, ^uXoK^ 27
prisoner, he<rp,uts

26

I proclaim, KTjpva-a-ia

put on,

cVSuo)

12

x''ip'i>

'

rock, TreVpa 20
I rouse, iyeipa 1
I rule, ap;(( 12
ruler,

apxav 16

Sabbath,

trd^/SaToi'

sacrifice, Bva-ia

26

I keep safe, Trjpea 2

I said, fijrov 14
saint, aytos 7, see p. 20

25
okas sis
Samaria, Sap.dpeia 11
sanctify, dytdfo) 13
Satan, SaravSy 19
salt,

promise, inayyiKia 5

13

I salt, dXi'fo)

proof, TeKpriptov 29
I prophesy, irpo(j)TiTeia>

prophet, irpo(j>TiTrjs 6
publican, reXai/iji 9
I pursue, SttoKo) 12

avi(m)pi 29

1
Sexopai 10
8 ; ayoXXido) 22
I release, diroKia 8
I remain, pJua 1 npoiTKapTepiw 20
remission, a(j>f(ns 17
remove, d^tim^jui 29
rent, a-xi(Tp.a 21
I repent, peravoiai 29
repentance, perdvoia 17
the rest, oj XotTroi 21
resurrection, aKdoxao-ts 18
I reveal, aTroicaXuTrrw 13
reward, p.ur66s 25
on the right hand, Sepias 28
righteousness, SiKoioa-vvij 5
I rise, avltTTapai 29
river, 7roTa;idr 13
robber, Xijorijr 9

1 rejoice,

Paul, navXof 11
pay, jiur66s 25
peace, elpfjvri 5
people, Xadf 3
I perceive, KaToKaji^avopm 21
I permit, t'dca 22
I persuade, neidai 8
Peter, airpos 16
Pharisee, iapia-aios

enaipa) 29
I read, dvayiyvunrKtii 8
I make ready, kroipA^m

reason, Xdyof 3
I receive, Xa/i^avo)

18
I pass by, napdya 19
patience, virofiov-q 31

Philip, iiXHTTrof

Wvos 18

race, ytvor 17
I raise, iyelpm

15

paralytic, TrapaXvriKos

I place,

21

quickly, raxfas 13

26

I owe, d(j)ei\aj

fni^dWa

15

e^ 6

outside, t|o)

1&7

12

save, <rd>^a) 1
saviour, trarfip 16
I saw, elSov 14
I say, \4ya 1

133

ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY

198

saying, p^^a 18
I scatter abroad, Siaa-neipa

19

I cause to stand

season, Kcupos 15
I see, ^Xen-o) 1 ; 6paa>
seed, inrepp.a 18
I seek, Cv^ea 2
I sell, dnoBiSotiai 27

22

I send, aTroffTeXXo) 1
Trip.na> 8
sentence, xpi'/ia 18
I separate, a<t>iaTrip.i 29
servant, SiaKovos 12
I serve, StaKovea 12
I set aside, dBeHm 24
I set before, jrapaTidrnxi 28
I set in order, Tda-a-a> 13
I set up, KaOia-Trjiii 29
seven, eTrra 23
sheep, npo^arov 4
;

shepherd,

Trot/x^v

show,

15
21
sick, a(r6evr)s 18
I

16

<j)alv<M)

Seiswiii

I am sick, do-dcveo)
sign, (Trj/ieiov 4

am

30

28

25
dpyvpiov 4 ; Spyvpos 26
Simon, Si'/imw 19
I sin, dfiaprdvia 14
sin, &naprr'ia 5
sinner, dpaprcoKos 10
slave, SoiXor 3
silent, cruuTrdiu

silver,

I sleep, Kot/idoi 23
soldier, o-TpariaTris

15

Solomon, SoXo/xSv 21
son, idr 8
soon, rapff'mf

sword, iid}(aipa 15
synagogue, avvayayrj 5
1

take counsel with, o-UK/SouXeuo/lai 21

I take hold of, Kparea 20
I take up, or away, alpm 15
I take with, iTapaKap,^dva> 20
I tarry, /leXXu 21
I taste, yfvop.ai 25
taxgatherer, reXoivris 9
I teach, SiSdo-Km 8
teacher, SiSdo-KoXof 9
teaching, RiSaxv 20
I tear, tnrapda(r<o 19
temple, itpdi/ 4
tempt, neipd^ai 11
temptation, irtipaapAs 23
than, ^ 18
I thank, eixapia-rda 30
that, Kfivos 8
I

shrine, vadi

strong, la-xvpos 21
stumble, I cause to, trKav8a\i(o> 13
I suffer, irda-x'^ 14
I suffered, en-oBov 14
I summon, npoa-KoKeui 31
I surname, eirucoKca 21
I surpass, ncpitrtrtva) 25
surpassing, irepia-a-os 26

I take, Xa^/Sdi/w

22

I shout, /Sodo)

29

d<j>iaTripii

sea, BoKaaira

away,

29
stand away, dKJtiaTripj. 29
I cause to stand up, dvla-TTjfu 29
I stand up, dviaraiJiai 29
star, d(rri)p 16
I steal, KXeVra) 23
I stone, Xidd^d), KoraXtdd^o) 26
stone, Xi'tfos 9

17

scribe, ypaiifiaTeis
scriptures, ypaxjtai

I spoke, ein-ov 14
I cause to stand, icrTr)p.i

13

soul, yjfvxv 5
sound, ^(Bvi/ 5

15
2
I speak with, trvvXoKea
spirit, Trvevjia 17

then, TOTf 30
there, fK 11
therefore, ouv 6
I think, Ko/ii'^o) 25

I sow, a-jrelpa

I speak, XaXco)

19

this, oJtos

thou,

(TV

11

(jtpovew

31

ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY
three, rptis

16

thrice, rpts

26

through, Sid with Gen. 9

plnrai
I throw, /3aXX(o 1
;

throw round

what kind ?
21

a net),

(of

ap.<\>i-

(motion to), els 6 irpos 9

to-morrow, r/ aSpwv 25
;

20

1 toil, KOTTUlflB

p,vr]fielov

20

tongue, y\S)tr<Ta 6
tooth, oSovf 16
I touch, aTTTopai 10
towards, npos 9

24

tradition, napaboais
TroTeoi

31

transgression, irapairrmpa

ShSpov 4

15
18
truly, dX>)flfiJ9 21
trumpet, a-dXiriy^
truth, aX^dcm 5

^, o,

Ti'r,

Ti

10; Sime 25

20

whole (sound), iyirjs 18

whole (complete), SXos 20

30

I am willing, diXa
wind, n-vfC^a 17
wine, olvos 14
wisdom, cro<l)ia 5
wise, (To(l)6s 12

true, aXridris

16

20

15

Kffl/ui;

vineyard, d/in-cXuv

16

napSivos 3
vision, opajua 25
virgin,

voice, ^tavTi

walk about, ntpmaria 8

I wash away, awoKova 21
watch, <l>v\aKJi 27
water, uSmp 17
way, dSdf 3
I go my way, oboiiropia 21
I

we,

jjpeis

weak,

I write, ypd(j>a> 1
writing, ypaijjrj 5

year, exos 17
you, i^els 11
young, vfos 21

young child, nmhiov 4

young man, veavias 6

11

dtrSevris

18

11

with (together with), o-uv 6 perd

with Gen. 9
withered, $tip6s 29
witness, pdprvs 29
1 bear witness, paprvpia 2
woman, yuv^ 17
I wonder at, davpd^a 13
dap^eopai 26
wonder, Wpar 17
word, Xdyoff 3 p^pa 18
I work, epyd^opai 10
work, epyov 4
workman, epydnjs 9
world, KOfr/xof 3 rj oiKovpevrj 29
I worship, wpotrKvvia 22
;

unclean, oKadapros 19
I understand, awlripi 30
until, 60): 15
village,

dvopia 26

11

I wish, ^ovXojuai, dcXo)

tribe, 611X17

two, Suo

who? what?

wicked, jrovijpdi 7
wickedness, dSixia 10
widow, xw" ^^
wife, yuv^ 17
will, de\ripa 17

14

I told, e'jToi'

tree,

27

when, ore 15
where, ttoC 22
e<os 15
who, which, Ss,

Kmpos 15

to

trample on,

ttoIos

while,

/SaXXa 19
time, )(p6vos

tomb,

28

14

I went, ^\6ov

throne, 6p6vos

am

I
weak, da6fv4a
well, fS 24

rpia 21

199

Zacharias, Zaxapiof 20

GEEEK INDEX
The numbers

refer to the Vocahulariei

dyopd 28

d/iapra)Xw 10
apvos 14
d/ijTfXttii' 16
d/t(^(j3dXXQ) 19
dyaycyi/axTKO) 8
'Avawias 19
dvdo'raa'tff 18
dvaxapito 20
"AvSpear 19

dyopd^d) 13

di/Tjp

dypos 10
Syo) 8

avBpatTTOS 3

'Ayados 7

ayaWidco 22
dyairda 22
dydnT} 5
dyanrjTos 1

ayyeXos 3
dyiaf01 13

ayws 7

ddfX(^os 3

12
ddtKLa 10
dSuvoTor 15
adtKco}

24

ddereo)

AiyuTTTOff

17

dviarrjfii 29
"Avvas 20
avoiyto 12
di'o^/a 26

aTrd-yo)

15

13

7
(iKddaproc 19
aKoKovdeo) 30

djroKaXvTTTO) 13

aKovo} 1

18

8
24
dn-oXouca 21
d7roXv6) 8
dnoo'Trda 28

dXijdm; 21

dTTOcrrtXXm 1

dXtjBrjS

dXifffl

27

dnoKpivofiai 10
dn'dK/)(0'ff

20

airoKTeivai

d7roXc<rei

25

28
18
d<TTrip 16
aCpiov 25
a^TOS 8
d(r0ev7js

17

af^ptav

18

*A;^X5a/id;^

diro6vrj(rKa 1

dXcKTfOp 16
dX^deia 5

16

d(r0Va}

26

dirapviopai 26

dTroSiSia/u

S\as 25

3p)((ov

30
dtjlla-TTipj, 29

dn-epxoiiai 10
aTTO 6

aiiui'ior

apX^ ^^

d<l>irjp.L

17
aipa 15
airc'o) 2
alav 16
a/ia

dpxupfvs 18
&p\oixai. 11

a<^ftTis

15

(iTrayycXXo)

apviofiai 10

apros 3

djrdffToXor 9

dXXd 6

airTop.ai

dXX^Xour 31
ijiaprdva 14
dfiaprria 5

dirmXcia 31

Baivo) 14
/SdXXcd 1

/SoTTTifw 8

^dirTurpa 17
fiawniTTrjS 6
^acriKela 5
/SatriXfur 17
/Saordfti) 13
BriBXefp. 15
jSt^Xioi/

^XcTTQ) 1

22
28
^ovXo^ai
/Soda)

|3oX^

10

dpyvpwu 4

TaXiXai'a 19
yd/xor 1

Spyvpos 26

ydp 6

GREEK INDEX

201

ytavaa 22

8d|a 6

eVdaSe 25

yeVof 17

8o|af(o 8

c'vreXXo)

doOXoff 3

evToXr) 5

Svvafiat 11

evaniov 28
i^epxojuu 19

25

yevofiai

yv 5,

14

yiyvirtTKa

yivaxTKa 14

21
6

yivofiat
yXfflO'cra

c^ovala 5

17

ypajifiaTeis 17

ypd<f)<o

18

eiSoi'

AaiSiS

SaifiovLov

8e

14

IT ly i,yvai(TK(i>

flKmv 16

18
18

Aavei'S

e|o>

eyeipa 1
eyivero 21
eyo) 11
^^Kos 18
'

17

yvi/^

26
nayyekia 5
enaBov 14
iralpui 29
nipxojiai 20
eVeptBrdcB 31
eVi 20
TTi^dKXa 21

'Eara

ydvu 17

ypacjni

e^eari 11
e|oSor 22

22
eyyi^a 13
iyyvs 20

26
yovevs 18

yi/owTTof

ypd^fjut

Siva/us 20
Swaroff 15
8^0 20

etirov

14

elprjvrj

elf

WiKoXeo) 21
wiarTOTr]!

efr

eMpxoiiai 19

eicrayw' 23.

28

fltTrropevofiat

heojuu 11

e's

24

eKeii'Off

SlOKOI/Of

epatrdco

eK7rXi7(r(roftat

SioKoyi^ofiai 31

inTTopeiofiai

duur^eipa 19
diSacKOXof 9
SiSao'Ka) 8

cK^eiya 26

SiSax"?

Si8a.pt

20
27

SifpXOfiai

20
26

12

10

23

StKatdu 22
8Utvov 20

13
16

e'XTTi'fo)

e'Xm's

eTOtfid^a 13
eroff

e3

17

24

eiiayyeXl^ofioL

i\ev6epos 11
cXkuo) 29

StKa[0(rwi;

12

eXeeo}

'EXX;i'

SiKaios 7

StdiKCtf

eaxoTos 7
(J")(pV 14
erepoE 7

13
eVXeyo/iOt 21
eKKdn-TO)

12
12

22

eadica 1

eKuXtjaia 5

Sia 9
Sid^oXos 11
diaKoi'60>

3
fpXopMi 10
eprfpios

eKei 11

10

bi)(opai
ac'>

e'it/3aXX<u

fiecTTrdrT/ff

28

28

el(T<j)4p(o

26
6

hi(Tp.ios

29
20
Wiffuva-yo) 31
tTrrd 23
ipya^ofiai. 10
fpydrrj! 9
epyov 4
7r(Xa/i/3ava}

6
18

30
hivhpov 4
8eLKVVp.l

23

20

7rLdvp.e(o

get 11

Se^idf

29

euayyeXtov 4
fvBfas 30
eidus 9
fuXoyeo) 12
fvpltTKto

eV 6

cixaptarea 30
e^ayov 14
i^Bpos 12

fvSva 12

ex<o 1

tfiTrpoadev

29

10

202

GREEK INDEX
lUKpos 21

GUI'

25

iu<r66s

20

fivTjiiciov

juxrrqpwv 27
WiovaTJs 19

Naor 21

otpciKiTris
oijjflXrjua

vfKpos 18

6(j>e[\a>

21

nepitra-os

IleVpos 16

waXator 21

30
26
TrXfipoa 22
TtXi/O'IOI' 26
TrXoIov 4
TTuevjia 17

iravra 15
TravTaxoC 29

TTOip.TJV

7rXai/ao/zat

S;^Xoff

31
25

IlaeSiov

vv\i<^ios

Tratff

16

viV, ruvt 21

vu^ 16

irXrjdvvaj

16

TrdiTore

29

Sijpof

'OdotTTo^eo)
odoff

21

o8ovs 16
oiba

11

oiKi'a

-oiKofio/xco)

olKovfievr]

Trapa 15
napa^oKr] 5
jrapayyAXo) 11
irapaylyvopm 19
irapaya 19

TrapaKaXeo) 2

irapaXap^dva 20

29

14
oXor 20
oiioios 26
ojuoeoo) 29

wapdnTtofia 30

opoKayita 11

Trar

ovofia 18

iracp^o)

15

n-aTeeo
TraTrjp

cipof

26

29

TTpO^aTOV 4
npofiepLfivdoi

14
31
17

Trpds

27

npo(Tfpxopai 20
Trpotrev^opui 21

26

IlaOXos 11

irpotre^o}

18

iravopm 29
neido) 8

TrpocKaXcco 31

20
25

TTCtpafo)

11

22
TrpotrtBTTOT' 4
wpo(j)rirfva> 12
nrpo<f)rjTrjs 6

Of 10
oiroc
OCTTIE

TreipaiTfios

TTpoiTKapTfpia)
irpoo'KvveQ}

23

ore 15

Tre/xTTO)

Sn 12

7rfi'raKia';^iXioe

ou

30

wpd 6

18

25
6pam 22

oiriVffl

opafia

TTpeTTOV
TrptV

irapBfVos 3
TTopicmj/it

10
13
norrf)pwv 15
TTOC 22
TTOUff 17
irpda-aai 13
TTopevofiai

jrpeiT^VTfpos 9

28

irapaTLdrjpL

TTOvrjpos 7

jroTa/ids

TrapdKeXvfievos 28
TrapaXvrtKo; 15

oivos

16
27
TToXtS 17
jroXXa 14
ffoXus 18

rroios

10

OtKOff

30

wapahiSa>p,i

oiKoSeaffonjr 9

TTOlCb)

27
napdboais 24

30

TTtiTTeiJa)

irians 18
miTTos 7

vr](TTev(i)

vdfioc

14
14

TTtrui

TTITTTO)

15

20

vo\),i^a>

20

irerpa

30
30

6<l)da\fi6s

vc^cXi;

25
26

nepttro'eva

oipdvios 30
ovpavos 9
our 17
oSrof 8
ou;^t 21

veavias 6
ve'or

'

203

oiBeis

n-fpi/SaXXco

18

irepiTTorfO)

25
8

19

irpaTos 7
TTTW^^dff 11

20

GREEK INDEX

204

^aiva 15

nvvOdvoiiai 22
irvp 17

0*0)^0)

<j>avep6a)

n&s 19

(rS)[ia

18
16

^apco'aco? 15

crtoTrjp

'Vrjfia

p'nrTO)

21

(rxi(riia

18
21

^e/3(o

14

<jivya)

22

TaTreiKoto

13

rafffro)

*^(7T0J 26

15

(j>6eipa>

^tXeo) 2
ilXtJTTTOJ 26

Sd^fiarov 4
irdXniy^ 16
Sa/xapeia 11

Ta^eas 13

(rapl 16

reXtui/T/s

Saravar 19
aijfieiov 4
Si/uov 19
fncoTrdai 25

Tepas 17

<l)povea)

TecTfrapdKovrd 19
Tijpia 2

<jiv\aKr]

anavdaKL^o} 13

t'lkt(o

TCKiirjpiov

(ro<pia

croipos

28
14
Ti/i^ 28
7-ir 20
Tif 20
TOTTOff 9
roTe 30
Tpels 16

12

21

CTrapacrira)

^0|3eo/xa(

Ti(9i;/i4

(TKOTOS 18
SoXojLia)v

29

TCKVOV 4

19

15
(Twepfia 18
(TTOUpOS 15
oraupdo) 22
aTreipta

26

Tu<^Xdj 11

orparnoTjjf 15

'Y-yiijr

(TV

11
6
erwayo) 8

udo)/}

(TVV

utdy 8

<Tvvayaryr) 5

UTrd'ya)

(Tvv^ovKevoiiai 21

un'aKOva) 11

(rvvedpiav

20
26
(TVV^rjTea) 26
irvvhjfu 30
(TVvXaXeco 19
trvpu 26

iiTre'p

<Twetr6ia>

vurd

CAMBBIDSE

31
27
(j>v\a^ 16
^uXdo'cro) 13
^uXt) 15
(j}a>V(D 16
<j)(0V7] 5
^s 17
"Kalpa 8
^apa 5

21

Tpo<pri

20
oTo^a 18
OTci/dff

;^IT(M1'

Xpij/iO

U/ilJ

18
17
11
8

19

Xpovos 9
Xpva-os 26
Xutplov 27
'i'fuSijs

29

21

VirORpiTT)!

'Q 14
JS( 11

V1T0p.0VT]

upa 5

{Jorepoff
{ii^doi

19

^djSos 19

xdpis 16
xWp 17

Tpta 21
rpi's

22

9
31
29

co:

15

22

PBINIED BY JOHN OLAY, M.A. AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS